Yamaha PSR-E353 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-E353

Categorie: Digitale piano's

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

YPT 300 - Full Size Enhanced Teaching System Music Keyboard

DIGITAL KEYBOARDDIGITAL KEYBOARD

Owner’s ManualOwner’s Manual

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-E353

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting

cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended!

If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’

cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the

larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, con-

sult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels

that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long

periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-

able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are

not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

For PSR-E353

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifica-

tions not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your author-

ity, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class

"B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements pro-

vides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in harmful

interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gen-

erates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic

devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be deter-

mined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute

this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate

retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Elec-

tronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park,

CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib-

uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

For AC adaptor and PSR-E353

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-

ature accompanying the product.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-

pod, bracket, or table specified by

the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the

cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-

vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-

aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is

damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For AC adaptor

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

(can_b_01)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

About the Manuals

In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available.

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do.

Computer-related Operations

Contains instructions about computer-related functions.

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E353” (for example) to the Model

Name box, then click [SEARCH].

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing

the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge.

Yamaha Online Member

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this

manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• AC adaptor

• Music rest

• Online Member Product Registration

*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer.

*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.

Formats and functions

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the

MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-

compatible music data can be accurately

played by any GM-compatible tone generator,

regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is

affixed to all software and hardware products

that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified

version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone

generation format. Naturally, you can play

back any XG song data using an XGlite tone

generator. However, keep in mind that some

songs may play back differently compared to

the original data, due to the reduced set of

control parameters and effects.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal

Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for con-

necting a computer with peripheral

devices. It allows “hot swapping” (con-

necting peripheral devices while the

power to the computer is on).

Style File Format (SFF)

The Style File Format combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-

how into a single unified format.

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch

Response feature gives you maximum

expressive control over the level of the

Voices.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

About the Manuals................................................ 5

Included Accessories............................................ 5

Formats and functions .......................................... 5

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Setting Up 12

Power Requirements .......................................... 12

Using the music rest ........................................... 13

Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or

External Audio Equipment ............................. 13

Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack

.. 13

Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13

Auto Power Off Function .................................... 14

Setting the Volume ............................................. 14

Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14

Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard

.14

Display Items and Basic Operations 15

Display Items ...................................................... 15

Basic Operations ................................................ 15

Reference

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16

Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16

Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16

Using the Metronome ......................................... 16

Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17

Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17

Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound

(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 18

Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 18

Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19

Playing the keyboard with two persons

(Duo mode) 21

Playing Styles 22

Using the Music Database.................................. 23

Registering a Style File....................................... 23

Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24

Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24

Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 26

Playing Songs 27

Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27

Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27

BGM Playback.................................................... 28

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 28

Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28

A-B Repeat......................................................... 29

Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29

Playing an External Audio Device with the

Built-in Speakers 30

Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody

Suppressor function) ......................................30

Using the Song Lesson Feature 31

Downloading the Song Book...............................31

Keys To Success ................................................31

Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................33

Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting

..34

Phrase Repeat ....................................................34

Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the

Chords (Chord Study) 35

Hear and experience a sound of a single chord..35

Hear and experience basic chord progressions..35

Playing Chords Along With Chord

Progressions of a Song

Play the chords in combination with “Waiting”

of the Lesson function .................................... 36

Recording Your Performance 37

Track Structure of a Song ................................... 37

Quick Recording..................................................37

Recording to a Specified Track ........................... 38

Clearing a User Song.......................................... 38

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 39

Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration

Memory ..........................................................39

Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration

Memory ..........................................................39

The Functions 40

Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 43

Connecting to a computer ...................................43

Connecting an iPhone/iPad.................................43

Backup and Initialization 43

Backup Parameters.............................................43

Initialization .........................................................43

Appendix

Troubleshooting.............................................44

Song Book Sample ........................................ 46

Voice List ........................................................ 56

Drum Kit List ..................................................61

Song List......................................................... 64

Style List ......................................................... 65

Music Database List ......................................66

Effect Type List ..............................................67

Specifications................................................. 69

Index................................................................ 70

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the

advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Contents

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

For AC adaptor

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic

instruments. Do not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible.

If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor

from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet,

keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if

the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the

instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

For PSR-E353

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or

even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These

precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, or place heavy objects on it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor

can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open

the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal

components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp

or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases,

bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument,

turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the

AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha

service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

DMI-5 1/3

The model number, serial number, power require-

ments, etc., may be found on or near the name plate,

which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this

serial number in the space provided below and retain

this manual as a permanent record of your purchase

to aid identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning

item may fall over and cause a fire.

• Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in

explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage.

- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be

charged.

- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as

necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys.

- Use the specified battery type (page 69) only.

- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model,

and made by the same manufacturer.

- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the

+/- polarity markings.

- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used

for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument.

- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came

with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when

charging.

• Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally

swallow them.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the

battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or

skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery

fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical

burns.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If

you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.)

Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to

you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but

are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not

to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to

prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip

over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,

immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug

from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off,

electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level.

When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to

unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage

to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC adaptor

Location

Connections

DMI-5 2/3

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you

or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or

operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period

of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can

cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss

or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage

to the product, damage to data, or damage to

other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,

stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.

Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you

set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to

avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or

vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct

sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to

the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified

operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the

instrument, since this might discolor the panel or

keyboard.

 Maintenance

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Some of the data of this instrument (page 43) are retained

when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may

be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save

your important data onto an external device such as a

computer (page 43).

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data

including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which

Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha

has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright

laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to

distribute media in which these contents are saved or

recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to

those in the product.

* The contents described above include a computer

program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE

data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc.

* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your

performance or music production using these contents is

recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is

not required in such cases.

 About functions/data bundled with the

instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or

arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the

original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual

are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are

the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective

companies.

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

DMI-5 3/3

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Setting Up

!1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6

@1 @2 @3 @4

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

Song List

(page 64)

Style List

(page 65)

Display

(page 15)

Front Panel

Voice List

(page 56)

Music Database List

(page 66)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................... page 13

w [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 13

e [DEMO] button......................................page 28

r [FUNCTION] button..............................page 40

t [METRONOME] button.........................page 16

y [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 24

u PART

[L] button ..............................................page 33

[R] button..............................................page 33

u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37

[REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37

i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 31

o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 34

!0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button

...............................................................page 33

!1 [A-B REPEAT] button...........................page 29

!2 [REW] button ........................................page 28

!3 [FF] button ............................................page 28

!4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28

!1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 22

!2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 24

!3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 24

!4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22

!5 [START/STOP] button .................. pages 22, 27

!6 [REC] button.........................................page 37

!7 [SONG] button ......................................page 27

!8 [VOICE] button .....................................page 16

!9 [STYLE] button.....................................page 22

@0 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ........... page 15

@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............page 16

[ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button .

.........page 18

@3 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 30

@4 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 39

@5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23

@6 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17

@7 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17

@8 [HARMONY] button..............................page 19

@9 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit.... page 16

Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument

assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.”

In the Lesson mode

In the Recording mode

In the Song mode

In the Style mode

#3 #4

#1 #2

Rear Panel

#0 [SUSTAIN] jack..................................... page 13

#1 [USB TO HOST] terminal*.................... page 43

#2 [AUX IN] jack ........................................ page 30

#3 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack ..................... page 13

#4 DC IN jack............................................. page 12

* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” (page 5) on the website. When connecting,

use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables

cannot be used.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Buttons having this indication can be used to call

up an alternate function when the relevant button

is pressed and held. Hold down this button until

the function is called up.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Power Requirements

Although the instrument will run either from an AC

adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is

more environmentally friendly than batteries and

does not deplete resources.

Using an AC adaptor

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(the backlight display is off).

2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power

supply jack).

3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Using Batteries

This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/

Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-

metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batter-

ies). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH

batteries are recommended for this instrument, since

other types may result in poorer battery performance.

 Installing the batteries

1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off.

2 Open the battery compartment cover located on

the instrument’s bottom panel.

3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow

the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-

ment.

4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that

it locks firmly in place.

When battery power becomes too low for proper

operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound

may be distorted, and other problems may occur.

When this happens, make sure to replace all batter-

ies with new ones or already-recharged ones.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the

wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC

outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trou-

ble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.

• After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse

order to disconnect the AC adaptor.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

adaptor

DC IN jack

(page 11)

NOTE

• Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with bat-

teries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of

data being recorded or transferred at the time.

• Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind

of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 42).

• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the

specified charger device when charging.

• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an

AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the

instrument.

NOTICE

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

 Setting the battery type

After installing new batteries and turning the power

on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately

(rechargeable or not) via Function number 046 (page

42).

Using the music rest

Connecting Headphones (sold

separately) or External Audio

Equipment

A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone

plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitor-

ing. The speakers are automatically shut off when a

plug is inserted into this jack.

The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the [PHONES/

OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier,

stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level

audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to

that device.

Connecting a Footswitch to the

[SUSTAIN] jack

You can produce a natural sustain as you play by

pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately)

plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack.

Turning the Power On/Off

1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.”

2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the

power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power,

press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a

second.

• Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of

the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long

period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level,

since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-

ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-

sician.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-

ponents, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn

off the power for all components.

NOTICE

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

1/4” stereo

phone plug

CAUTION

• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

• The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and

style (automatic accompaniment; page 22).

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a

small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the

instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a

long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the

wall AC outlet.

NOTICE

NOTE

CAUTION

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Auto Power Off Function

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this

instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is

not operated for a specified period of time. The

amount of time that will elapse before the power is

automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.



To set the time that elapses before Auto

Power Off is executed:

Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until

“AutoOff” (Function 045; page 42) appears, then use

the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value.

Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes)

Default value: 30 (minutes)



To disable the Auto Power Off function:

Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power while holding down the

lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be

disabled by selecting Off in Function number 045

(page 42).

Setting the Volume

When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME]

dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard

sound.

Selecting an EQ Setting for the

Best Sound

Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you

the best possible sound when listening through differ-

ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal

speakers, headphones, or an external speaker sys-

tem.

Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO]

button for longer than a second to call

up “024 MasterEQ” (Function 024; page

41).

“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.

Use the [+] or [-] button to select the

desired Master EQ type.

Master EQ types

Changing the Touch Response of

the Keyboard

You can specify the Touch Response (how the sound

responds to your playing strength). This can be set

via Function number 007 (page 40).

• Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the

power is turned off. For details, see page 43.

• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not

turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified

period of time. Always turn off the power manually when

the instrument is not in use.

• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period

of time while connected to an external device such as an

amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the

instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to

the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-

tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the

power to turn off automatically when a device is con-

nected, disable Auto Power Off.

• Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long

period of time, or your hearing may be damaged.

NOTE

NOTICE

CAUTION

1 Speaker

Optimum for listening via the instru-

ment’s built-in speakers.

2 Headphone

Optimum for headphones, or for listen-

ing via external speakers.

3 Boost Features more powerful sound.

4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.

5Bright

Lowers the mid range for a brighter

sound.

6 Mild

Lowers the high range for a softer

sound.

024

MasterEQ

Speaker

Current Master

EQ type

Hold for longer

than a second.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Display Items and Basic Operations

Display Items

Basic Operations

Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are

used to select items and change values.

 Number buttons

Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or

value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,

the first zeroes can be omitted.

 [-] and [+] buttons

Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.

Press and hold either button to continuously increase or

decrease the value in the corresponding direction.

GrandPno

001

003

These indicate the operating condition

of the instrument.

Song/Voice/Style

Normally this indicates the notes you

play. When the Song Lesson function

is used, this indicates the current

notes and chord of playback. When

the Dictionary function (page 26) is

used, this indicates the notes of the

chord you specify.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or above

the staff are indicated by “8va.”

• For a few specific chords, not all notes

may be shown, due to space limita-

tions in the display.

NOTE

This area indicates the Lesson

related status is on.

Keys To Success

(page 31)

Phrase Repeat (page

34)

Chord Progression

(page 36)

Indicates the Passing

Status (page 32) of

the Keys To Success

lesson.

Lesson Indication

Each indication is shown when the

corresponding function is turned on.

...

Touch Response

(page 14)

...

Ultra-Wide Stereo

(page 18)

...

Auto Accompani-

ment (page 22)

... Split (page

)

... Dual (page

)

... Harmony (page

)

... Arpeggio (page

)

... Duo (page

)

On/Off status

Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto

Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or

specified via Song playback.

Normally indicates the current measure number

of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION]

button (page 40) is in use, this indicates the

Function number.

Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and

chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use.

Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or

when using the Dictionary function.

Chord

Measure or Function

Keyboard Display

003

Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or

target Track of Song recording (page 29, 38).

Lit: Track contains data

Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data

Flashing: Track is selected as recording track

Indicates the current beat of playback.

Song Track status

Beat

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3], or simply

press [3].

Example: Selecting Voice 003,

Harpsichord.

Press briefly to

increase.

Press briefly to

decrease.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-

ment has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,

drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical

sounds.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name will be shown.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]

buttons to select the desired Voice.

Refer to the Voice List on page 56.

Play the keyboard.

Preset Voice Types

When you want to reset various settings to default

and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button.

The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be

selected as the Main Voice.

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a

device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for

practicing.

Press the [METRONOME] button to start

the metronome.

Press the [METRONOME] button again

to stop the metronome.

To change the tempo:

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo.

To set the Time Signature:

Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up

“TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 42), then use the

Number buttons.

To set the Metronome Volume:

This can be set via Function number 038 (page 42).

Selecting a Main Voice

001–196 Instrument Voices (including sound effects).

197–214

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are

assigned to individual keys, from which they

can be played. Details on the instruments and

key assignments of each Drum Kit can be

found in the Drum Kit List on page 61.

215–234

Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by

simply playing the keyboard (page 19).

235–573 XGlite Voices (page 58)

000

One Touch Setting

The One Touch Setting feature automatically

selects the most suitable Voice when you

select a Style or Song (excepting the Song

inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select

Voice number “000” to activate this feature.

GrandPno

001

Voice name

The Voice shown here

becomes the Main Voice

for the instrument.

Voice number

Appears after the

[VOICE] button is

pressed.

Flute

096

Select 096 Flute

Playing the “Grand Piano”

Using the Metronome

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

Reference

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different

Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”

Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.

Press the [DUAL] button again to exit

from Dual.

To select a different Dual Voice:

Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suit-

able for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a

different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual]

button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 41),

then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,

you can play a different Voice between the Left hand

and Right hand areas.

Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.

The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and

Right hand areas.

You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area

of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and

Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-

board.

The highest key for the Left hand area is referred

to as the “Split Point” (Function 006;

page 40

)

which can be changed from the default F#2 key.

Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit

from Split.

To select a different Split Voice:

Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice”

(Function 016;

page 41

), then use the number buttons

[0]–[9], [+], [-].

Layering a Dual Voice

GrandPno

001

Appears when Dual

Voice is on

Two Voices will

sound at the

same time.

Playing a Split Voice in the Left

Hand area

GrandPno

001

Appears when Split

Voice is on

Split Voice

Main Voice and

Dual Voice

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider

sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing

the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the

Ultra-Wide Stereo effect.

Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-

ton to turn it on.

The sound will expand around you—as if the

speaker position is outside of the instrument.

Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-

ton again to turn it off.

To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type:

Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button

to call up “Wide” (Function 025;

page 41

), then use

the Number buttons.

This instrument can apply various Effects as listed

below to the instrument’s sound.

Reverb

Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the

sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called

up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another

one via Function number 020 (

page 41

). You can also

set the Reverb depth via Function number 021 (

page

Chorus

Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more

spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is

called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select

another one via Function number 022 (

page 41

Panel Sustain

By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function

number 023 (

page 41

), you can add a fixed, auto-

matic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can

also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold

separately; page 13).

Playing with enhanced, more spa-

cious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)

GrandPno

001

Appears when Ultra-

Wide Stereo is on.

Applying Effects to the Sound

• Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to

which sustain is not applied.

NOTE

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main

Voice.

By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply har-

mony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or

echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or

the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is

selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automati-

cally played back when you simply play the appropri-

ate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could

play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth—

and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a

variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be

used creatively in music production as well as perfor-

mance.

Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-

ton to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio

function.

When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on,

the most suitable one will be selected for the cur-

rent Main Voice.

If you want to select a specific type, select it by

the operation steps 2 and 3 below.

Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO]

button for longer than a second so that

“Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 41)

appears on the display.

After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the

current type appears.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]

buttons to select the desired type.

When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer

to the Harmony Type list on page 67; to specify

an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list

on page 67.

Press a note or notes on the keyboard to

trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio.

When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony

part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for

example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the

played sound of the Main Voice.

Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeg-

gios (broken chords) are automatically played

back when you simply play the appropriate notes

on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase

differs depending on the number of pressed notes

and the area of the keyboard.

To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off,

press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] but-

ton again.

Adding Harmony or Arpeggio

• The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main

Voice.

• When selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234,

the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on.

• When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005,

the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand

melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press

chords in the auto accompaniment range of the key-

board.

GrandPno

001

Analogon

106

Appears when the Har-

mony is turned on.

Appears when the

Arpeggio is turned on.

NOTE

• When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176,

select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main

Voice.

143–173: Select a drum Voice.

174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc” (Voice

No.207).

175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.208) or

“Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.209).

176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.210).

Duet

001

028

Harm/Arp

028

Current type

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

To adjust the Harmony Volume:

This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (

page

To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity:

This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (

page

Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the

Footswitch (Hold)

You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback

continues even after the note has been released, by

pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN]

jack.

Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of

times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031)

item appears on the display.

After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the

current setting is shown.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]

buttons to select “Arp Hold.”

If you want to restore the footswitch function to

sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both

hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.”

Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio

playback using the footswitch.

Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then

press the footswitch. Even if you release the

notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop

Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch.

How the effect is applied to the sound for

the various Types

• Harmony Type 001 to 005

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22).

• Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

• Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo)

Keep holding

down the keys.

• Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo)

Play the keys.

• Arpeggio Type 027 to 176

Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice

and the Dual Voice.

Arpeggio function applies only to the split

Voice.

When Split is off:

When Split is on:

• Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/

Dual Voices simultaneously.

• Selecting a Voice number between 225 and 234 as

the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split auto-

matically.

NOTE

Pdl Func

Sustain

031

Arp Hold

031

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode)

When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the

instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one per-

son on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in

which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other per-

son watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side.

To start this instrument in the Duo

mode, simultaneously hold down the [L]

button and press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power.

“DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few sec-

onds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point

and the keyboard is divided into two sections:

one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice.

One person should play the left Voice

section of the keyboard while the other

plays the right Voice section.

Selecting a Voice

Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in

“Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16.

How sounds are output in the Duo mode

Notes played in the left Voice section sound from

the left side speaker while notes played in the

right Voice section sound from the right side

speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This out-

put setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut”

setting (Function 027; page 41).

Using sustain in the Duo mode

Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice

sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by

using one of the following methods in the Duo

mode like the usual mode.

• Press the foot switch (page 13) connected to the

[SUSTAIN] jack.

• Set “Sustain” (Function 023; page 41) to on.

Style Playback in the Duo mode

Although full Style features (accompaniment)

cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part

of a Style can be played back while playing the

left/right Voices normally.

Recording in the Duo mode

The right Voice section and the left Voice section

are recorded on the same track.

To exit from the Duo mode, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the

power, and turn the power back on again

normally.

• The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the

keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice).

• In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed

from F

• When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162

to 188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice.

• Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio

and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode.

DuoMode

Equivalent to C3

Split Point: 066 (F#3)

Left Voice

Equivalent to C3

Right Voice

NOTE

• In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteris-

tics of the strereo sound may differ from those in the nor-

mal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate”

(page 41). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference

may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit fea-

tures a different stereo pan position.

• Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left

Voice section and the right Voice section.

• While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is main-

tained even when the power is turned off.

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate

“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of

Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.

Press the [STYLE] button, then use the

number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select

the desired Style.

The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in

the Style List (page 65).

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

on the Auto Accompaniment.

With this operation, the area of the keyboard to

the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the

“Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for

specifying the chords.

The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment

range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can

be changed from the default of F#2 via Function

number 006 (page 40).

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment range to start playback.

Play a melody with the right hand and chords with

the left hand.

For information about chords, refer to “Chord

Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the

Chord Dictionary function (page 26).

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations

to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,

refer to page 24.

Adjusting the Style Volume

To adjust the volume balance between Style play-

back and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume.

This can be set via Function number 001 (page 40).

8BtModrn

002

Style Name

Style Number

This icon appears when the [STYLE]

button is pressed.

LoveSong

025

This icon appears when auto-

matic accompaniment is on.

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto

Accompaniment

range

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

To play back the rhythm part only

If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm

part can be played back, and you can play a melody

performance using the entire keyboard range.

LoveSong

025

Flashes when sync start is on.

Split Point

• Since the Pianist category Styles (150–158) have no

rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start

rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make

sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page.

NOTE

Playing Styles

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired

Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music

Database, just selecting the favorite music genre

calls up the ideal settings.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start

are automatically turned on.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to

select the desired Music Database.

This operation calls up the panel settings such as

Voice and Style that are registered to the selected

Music Database. The category name of Music

Database List is provided on the front panel, or in

the Music Database List (page 66).

Play the keyboard as described in Steps

4–5 on page 22.

In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an

external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a com-

puter) as Style number 159 which will be used in the

same way as the Preset Styles.

Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a

computer to this instrument by using

Musicsoft Downloader.

For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Oper-

ations” (page 5) on the website. You can transfer

two or more Styles to this instrument although

only a single Style can be registered to Style

number 159.

Press the [FUNCTION] button several

times until “StyleReg” (Function 008;

page 40) appears.

After about two seconds, a registerable Style file

name will appear in the display.

If necessary, select the desired Style by

using the [+] or [-] button.

Press the [0] button.

A confirmation message for the register operation

will appear.

Press the [+/YES] button to actually reg-

ister the file.

Using the Music Database

AlvFever

001

Registering a Style File

StyleReg

008

Playing Styles

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to

match the song you are playing. These instructions

cover a typical example for using the Sections.

1–3

Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to

select Main A or Main B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the

Intro section.

Play a chord with your left hand to start

playback of the Intro.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 25.

After the Intro finishes, play the key-

board according to the progression of

the Song you are playing.

Play chords with your left hand while playing mel-

odies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/

AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will

change to Fill-in then Main A or B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

The Section switches to the Ending. When the

Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-

cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing

back.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the

Te mpo va l u e.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset

the value to the default tempo of the current Style or

Song.

Using the Tap function

While a Song or Style is playing back, press the

[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo

to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is

stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times

to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for

a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat

Song or Style.

Style Variations—Sections

MAIN A

Current Section

INTRO≥A

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto Accompa-

niment range

Changing the Tempo

FILL A≥B

ENDING

Tempo

090

Current Tempo value

Playing Styles

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accom-

paniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musi-

cally, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.

 indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.

• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm

and bass parts will be played.

Chord Types for Style Playback

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two,

or three fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it (three

keys altogether).

Playing Styles

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

The Dictionary function is useful when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn

how to play it.

Press and hold the [1 LISTENING

2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer

than a second to call up “Dict.”

“Dict.” will appear in the display.

This operation will divide the entire keyboard into

the three ranges as illustrated below.

• The range to the right of “ROOT ”:

Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no

sound.

• The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and

“ROOT ”:

Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no

sound.

• The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”:

Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in

the above two ranges.

As an example, learn how to play a GM7

(G major seventh) chord.

2-1.

Press the “G” key in the section to the right

of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as

the root note.

2-2.

Press the key labeled “M7” in the section

between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.”

The notes you should play for the specified

chord (root note and chord type) are con-

veniently shown in the display, both as

notation and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Following the notation and keyboard

diagram in the display, try playing a

chord in the range to the left of “CHORD

TYPE .”

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell

sound signals your success and the chord name

in the display flashes.

Looking Up Chords Using the

Chord Dictionary

Dict.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Chord Type range

Root range

Keyboard

playing range

Far right of

the key-

board

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers

to C major. However, when specifying major chords

here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the

root note.

• These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary

function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(

11 ) ,

5, M7

5, M7aug,

m7(11), mM7(9), mM7

5, 7

5, sus2

Dict.

001

Dict.

001

Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

Notation of

chord

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs

You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of

the functions, such as Lesson.

 Song Category

The Songs are organized by category as listed below.

Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo

Songs in sequence.

When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in

sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, play-

back will repeat continuously, starting again from the

first Song (001).

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the

Number buttons to select the desired

Song.

Refer to the Song List (page 64).

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

playback.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button

again.

To change the tempo:

Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24.

Adjusting the Song Volume

To adjust the volume balance between Song play-

back and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume.

This can be set via Function number 002 (page 40).

These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.

Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice

with ease, and another more challenging version.

We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down

from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody

of these songs with your right hand.

Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data).

(Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand

first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.)

These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other

instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.

These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano

pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orches-

tral backing.

Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing the

keyboard according to the LCD display indications.

Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions.

Songs (User Songs) you record yourself.

Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 5).

Listening to a Demo Song

• You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing

the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to

the beginning of the selected Song.

Selecting and Playing Back a

Song

NOTE

Elise 1

004

Song name

Song number

Appears after the [Song]

button is pressed.

Playing Songs

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button

will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeat-

edly. This setting can be changed so that, for exam-

ple, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting

you use the instrument as a background music

source.

Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer

than a second.

“DemoGrp” (Function 042; page 42) is shown in

the display for a few seconds, followed by the cur-

rent repeat playback target.

Use the [+] or [-] button to select a play-

back group.

Press the [DEMO] button to start play-

back.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again

or press the [START/STOP] button.

Random Song Playback

When the Demo Group (above) is set to something

other than “Demo,” the playback order via the

[DEMO] button can be changed between numerical

order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNC-

TION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Func-

tion 043;

page 42

) is called up, then select “Normal”

or “Random.”

Like the transport controls on an audio player, this

instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW)

and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song.

You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other

desired Voice.

Select a Song.

Select the desired Voice.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for

longer than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display

for a few seconds, and the selected Voice

replaces the Song’s original melody Voice.

BGM Playback

Demo Preset songs (001–003)

Preset All preset songs (001–102)

User All User songs (155–159)

Download All songs transferred from a computer (160–)

• When User songs and Download songs data do not

exist, Demo songs are played back.

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Song Fast Forward, Fast

Reverse, and Pause

• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast

Forward will only work within the range between A and B.

• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song

playback by using the [DEMO] button.

Changing the Melody Voice

• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody

Voice.

• You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song.

Fast Reverse

During playback, press

this button to rapidly

return to an earlier

point in the Song.

Fast Forward

During playback, press this

button to rapidly skip ahead

to a later point in the Song.

Pause

During playback, press

this button to pause play-

back, and press again to

start from that point.

NOTE

Playing Songs

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

You can play back only a specific section of a Song

repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B

point (end point) in one-measure increments.

Start playback of the Song (page 27).

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the start point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A

point.

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the end point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set

the B point.

The specified A-B section of the song will now

play repeatedly.

To cancel repeat playback, press the

[A-B REPEAT] button.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below),

Songs other than Song numbers 115 to 154 consist

of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individu-

ally by pressing the corresponding button, L or R.

By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off dur-

ing playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned

on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on

the keyboard.

A-B Repeat

• You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song

is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to

select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT]

button for each point, then start playback.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the

Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting

playback.

• The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you

select another Song mode.

Repeat playback of this section

NOTE

Turning Each Part On/Off

• Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the

Parts.

FrereJac

020

010

Lit: Track con-

tains data

Unlit: Track is

muted or con-

tains no data

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers

You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player,

with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you

play the keyboard along with playback of your music player.

Turn off the power for both the external

audio device and this instrument.

Connect the audio device to the instru-

ment’s [AUX IN] jack.

Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at

one side for connecting to this instrument and the

plug matching the output jack of the external

audio device at the other side.

Turn on the external audio device, then

this instrument.

Play back the connected external audio

device.

The sound of the audio device is output through

the speakers of this instrument.

Adjust the volume balance between the

external audio device and this instrument.

If possible, adjust the playback level of the external

audio device first, to achieve optimum balance.

Play the keyboard along with the sound

of the audio device.

After finishing the performance, stop

playback of the audio device.

When the sound of an external audio device is output

through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the

volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You

can use the function to cancel the melody part then

practice it via the keyboard.

Play back the connected external audio

device.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton to turn it on.

When the melody or vocal sound may

not be canceled (or lowered) as expected

Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR]

button for longer than a second to call

up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 41)

while the Melody Suppressor function is

turned on.

Adjust the pan position of the sound to

be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+],

[-] buttons.

Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-

ton again to turn it off.

• You can adjust the level of the input from the external

audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function num-

ber 003 (page 40) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons.

• Before connecting, turn off the power of both this

instrument and the external audio device. Also,

before turning the power on or off, make sure to set

all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage

to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent

hearing loss may occur.

• After connecting, first turn on the power to the exter-

nal audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this

order when you turn the power off.

Audio device (Portable

audio player, etc.)

Stereo-mini

plug

NOTE

CAUTION

NOTICE

Lowering the volume of a melody

part (Melody Suppressor function)

• If an external audio device is not properly connected to

the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor

function cannot be turned on or shown in the display,

even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button.

• Depending on the particular music content, the melody

or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if

the Melody Suppressor is turned on.

MelodySP

Appears when Melody Suppressor is on

NOTE

SupprPan

026

Hold for longer than a second.

L63 – C – R63

(Left – Center – Right)

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Using the Song Lesson Feature

You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,”

“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a

Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in

playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a spe-

cific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we

suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song

Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registra-

tion at the following website:

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score

in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To

obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration

at the following website:

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in

the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the

entire Song.

Prepare the Song Book.

Download the Song Book from the above web-

site, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs

at the end of this manual.

The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are

pre-programmed) will differ depending on the

Song. For details, refer to the Song Book.

Press the [SONG] button, then select a

Song for your lesson.

Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the

“LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corre-

sponding page of the Song Book.

Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button

to engage this lesson.

The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R”

or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating

that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If

you have already passed several Steps, the next

Step number appears on the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

Lesson.

After the lead-in, playback of the current Step

starts.

Practice the phrase in the current Step.

Referring to the notation in the Song Book and

the notes shown on the display, press the notes.

Downloading the Song Book

Keys To Success

• All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103–

154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN

TO PLAY” category Songs.

NOTE

Elise 1

004

• For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is

applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may

be slower than original.

Step01

Appears when Keys to

Success is on

Lesson part

: Right-hand lesson

: Left-hand lesson

: Both-hands lesson

Current Step number

Step01

001

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Confirm the evaluation in the current

Step.

When the current Step reaches the end, your per-

formance will be evaluated and your score (from

0–100) is shown in the display.

A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did

not pass this Step and you should try the same

Step again, which begins automatically. A score

of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step

and you should try the next Step, which begins

automatically.

Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on.

In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all

the way through the Song. When you pass all

Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automati-

cally be turned off and playback stops.

To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO

SUCCESS] button.

Confirming the Passing Status

You can confirm the passing status of each Song

simply by selecting a Song and each Step.

When Step is selected

When Song is selected

Clearing the Passing Status

You can clear existing passing status entries for the

entire Song or a specific Step of the Song.

To clear the passing status entries of all Steps:

Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS

TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds,

with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared”

message will appear on the display.

To clear the passing status entry for a specific

Step:

Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success,

select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS

TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds.

A “Cleared” message will appear on the display.

• If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the

Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of

the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice”

appears in the display.

• Even during lesson, you can select another Step by

using the [+]/[-] buttons.

Excellen

068

Displayed when you’ve

passed the Step.

NOTE

• This operation cannot be executed during playback.

Step01

001

✩ : Passed

No information: Not yet passed

Elise 1

004

001

✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet

passed in addition to the last Step

✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Lesson 1—Listening

In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The

model melody/chords of the part you selected will

sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.

Lesson 2—Timing

In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the

notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong

notes, the correct notes shown in the display will

sound.

Lesson 3—Waiting

In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on

the display. The Song pauses until you play the right

note, and playback tempo will change to match the

speed at which you are playing at.

Press the [SONG] button then select a

Song for your lesson.

Press either or both the [R] and [L] but-

tons to select the part you want to prac-

tice.

Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING

3 WAITING] button to start playback of

the Song Lesson.

Pressing this button repeatedly will change the

Lesson number from 1: LISTENING  2: TIMING

 3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until

the desired number is shown on the display.

When Lesson playback reaches to the

end, check your evaluation Grade on the

display.

“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your per-

formance in four levels.

After the evaluation display has appeared, the

lesson will start again from the beginning.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by

pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Listening, Timing and Waiting

• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained dur-

ing Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF

via the Function number 041 (page 42).

• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs

(SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page

43), but cannot be applied to the User Songs.

• In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the

current Song does not contain a left-hand part.

NOTE

RightLeft

BothHand

Left-hand

lesson

Right-hand

lesson

Both-hands

lesson

NOTE

• During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by

pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any

time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

• The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting;

page 16) during the Lesson.

• When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key

position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave

units), depending on the selected Voice.

• The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during les-

sons.

• Songs 115 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening,

Timing and Waiting Lessons.

NOTE

~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~

~~~~

Excellent!

Very Good!

Good

NOTE

Using the Song Lesson Feature

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page

31) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson

(page 33).

Enable the Keys to Success lesson.

Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 31.

Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-]

buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING

2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly

to select the desired lesson.

The selected lesson playback starts under the

Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the

current Step via the selected Lesson. As evalua-

tion for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play

key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is

not available.

To return to only the Keys to Success

mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING

3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select

“off.”

To exit from the Lesson mode, press the

[KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.

You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by

selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks

pre-programmed in the Preset Songs (excepting the

Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm

the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page

5).

Practicing only a single Phrase

During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT]

button at the phrase you want to practice. The corre-

sponding Phrase number will appear in the display

and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off

the L or R part (page 29), then practice the phrase

which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied.

Even during repeat playback, you can select any

other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you

can return to normal playback by pressing the

[PHRASE REPEAT] button again.

Using Phrase Repeat with Listening,

Timing or Waiting

With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTEN-

ING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or

three times to start and use Lesson playback with

Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again sev-

eral times to exit from the Lesson mode stops play-

back and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode.

Practicing two or more Phrases

By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B

(as the end point), you can practice two or more

Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback,

press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current

Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the

desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again

to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display,

and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts.

To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button

again.

Keys to Success with Listening,

Timing or Waiting

Phrase Repeat

Phrase mark

Repeat playback of this

section

• In this status, the evaluation function is not available.

• You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped

by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons.

• Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between

Point A and the end of the Song.

REPEAT

P03

Appears when the Phrase

Repeat function is on

Phrase number

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the

Chords (Chord Study)

You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by

playing back Song numbers 103 to 114 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers

103 to 109 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am,

Bm; respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the

chords one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 110 to 114 consist of several

chords strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord

progressions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by

playing back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music

notation and key/chord indications shown in the display.

Select a Song from Song numbers 103

to 109 in the “CHORD STUDY” category

by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and

Playing Back a Song” on page 27

Press the [START/STOP] button to play

back the selected Song.

Play the keyboard while looking at the

notes shown on the display.

Select a Song from Song numbers 110 to

114 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons.

Press the [START/STOP] button to play

back the selected Song.

Play the keyboard while looking at the

notes shown on the display.

Listen to the basic chord progression, and play

along with the Song repeatedly until you can

smoothly perform and play along with the chord

changes.

Hear and experience a sound of

a single chord

• When playing the keyboard while playing back a

Song, you should turn off any parts you don’t intend

to have played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the

maximum number of simultaneous notes.

• You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing

the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button.

ChdStd01

103

003

NOTICE

NOTE

Hear and experience basic

chord progressions

• You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing

the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button.

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song

Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typ-

ical chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by

playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the

display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence—

from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and

naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you

to practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords.

Select a Song from Song numbers 115 to

154 in the “Chord Progression” category

by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and

Playing Back a Song” on page 27.

Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button.

After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the

display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and

the number of the keys to be pressed are shown.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the num-

ber of the keys to be played.

Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number

of the keys to press is increased from just one

root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three

notes (3Notes) and four notes (All).

Press the [START/STOP] button to play

back the selected Song.

Play the keyboard looking at the notes

shown on the display.

Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button

again to turn the Chord Progression

function off.

To change the key of a Song:

When Chord Progression is on, press one of the

keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right

of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to

change the tonic pitch of the Song.

For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song

of C major, the key changes to D major.

You can practice the playing the chords in combina-

tion with “Waiting” (page 33) of the Lesson function

by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING

3 WAITING] button once.

• The initial key setting is C major or A minor.

• The number of the keys to press can also be set by using

the number buttons [1]–[4].

• When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5,

the notes will not sound.

C 1Note

CPg

The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C

The number of the keys

to press: 1

Appears when Chord

Progression is on.

NOTE

C 2Notes

CPg

NOTE

C 1Note

CPg

001

NOTE

• The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback.

The number of the keys to be played

Only one root note (1Note)

Press only the root note of the chord.

Two notes (2Notes)

Press the 3

interval of a chord along with the root

note, and understand the difference between major

chords and minor chords.

Three notes (3Notes)

Press the 5

interval of a chord along with the root

note and the 3

Four notes (All)

Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very often,

chords are played with just three notes; however,

another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes added.

Keep in mind that depending on the chord, there may

be no 4

note.

Play the chords in combination

with “Waiting” of the Lesson

function

• Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on

the display (excluding the range of C5

–

B5, which are used to

change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the

chords, the playback will progress.

DEFGAB

Root range

Far right of

the keyboard

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Performance

You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers

155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument.

You can record your performance to the following two

tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously.

Track 1:

Your melody performance is recorded to this track.

Track 2:

Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord

changes and Section changes), is recorded to this

track.

Recording Data Capacity:

A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord

changes can be recorded to the five User Songs.

The operation is convenient for recording a new Song

without having to specify a track.

Make the desired settings such as Voice

and Style settings.

If you want to record only the melody perfor-

mance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to

record Style playback as well as melody perfor-

mance, turn ACMP on (page 22).

Press the [REC] button to enable the

Record mode.

On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User

Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select

another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons.

To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC]

button again to stop flashing on the display.

Play the keyboard to start recording.

If ACMP is turned on, you can independently

record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by

pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing

the Section (page 24).

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

recording.

When using a Style, you can stop recording also

by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then

waiting until playback ends.

To play back the recorded Song, press

the [START/STOP] button.

Track Structure of a Song

Quick Recording

• If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1

(Song Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In

this case, since you will record over and erase any

previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you

save your important data to a computer (see page

43).

• ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you

can select another Style in this status by using the

[STYLE] and Number buttons.

• After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown

on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the

power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so

can damage the internal memory and result in a loss

of data.

User 1

rEC

001

User Song Number

Flashes

NOTICE

NOTE

36 48

7260

Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2)

Auto Accompani-

ment range

NOTICE

Recording Your Performance

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Make the desired settings, such as

those of Voice or Style.

If you want to record the melody performance,

turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record

Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22).

While holding down the [REC] button,

press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to

engage the Record mode.

If you want to record Style playback, make sure to

select the Track 2. If you want to record melody

performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as

desired. The illustration below is the example

when selecting Track 2.

Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the

User Song you want to record.

If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for

example and Track 1 contains already recorded

data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning

on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will deter-

mine whether you listen to a previously recorded

Track or not while recording a new Track.

Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in

“Quick Recording.”

Press the [SONG] button then select the

desired User Song by using the Number

buttons.

Press and hold the [REC] button for lon-

ger than a second.

A confirmation message appears.

To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message appears again.

To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the

Song.

A “Writing!” message appears while the track is

being cleared.

Recording to a Specified Track

Limitations while Recording

• You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome

click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings.

• The following settings and buttons are not available,

or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded:

ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus

Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] but-

ton, [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

001

User 1

rEC

Clearing a User Song

ClrUser1

YES

Hold for longer

than a second.

Sure?

YES

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favor-

ite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be

memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9.

Make the desired settings such as those

for Voice and Style.

Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM-

ORY] button for longer than a second.

“MemNo.?” appears on the display.

Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to mem-

orize the current panel settings.

If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, an “Overwr?” message

appears in the display. To overwrite, press the

[+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO].

Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button.

“LoadNo.?” appears on the display.

Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call

up the panel settings you memorized.

The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears

in the display.

The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed

by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons.

Memorizing Panel Settings to

the Registration Memory

• If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, the previous data is deleted

and overwritten by the new data.

• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings

to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may

be damaged or lost.

MemNo.?

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTICE

Recalling Panel Settings from

the Registration Memory

Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-

tion Memory

Style settings*

Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume,

Tempo, Main A/B

Voice settings

Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of

the related Functions

Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of

the related Functions

Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the

related Functions



Effect settings:

Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type

Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/

off and all settings of the related Functions



Other settings:

Panel Sustain on/off, Transpose, Voice

output

* When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be

recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style

settings can be recorded or called up.

LoadNo.?

REGIST 1

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters

such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects.

Press the [FUNCTION] button several

times until the desired item appears.

Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the

Function number increases one by one. To

decrease the Function number by one, simultane-

ously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and

press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Func-

tion number by one, simultaneously hold down

the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button

briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button

does not change the Function number.

After a few seconds, the Function name may be

replaced with the setting value depending on the

selected Function.

Set the value by using the number but-

tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Function List

• The Function number does not appear in the display

during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat

value appears instead.

StyleVol

100

001

Current value

Function number

Function name

NOTE

• To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons;

[SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE].

Direct numeric

entry.

• Increment

value by 1.

•Yes

•On

Press simultaneously

to recall the default

setting.

• Decrement

value by 1.

•No

•Off

NOTE

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

Volume

001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 22)

002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 27)

003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100

Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to

the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 30)

Overall

004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.

005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz

Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in

approx. 0.2Hz increments.

006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split

“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)

and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-

ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.

007 Touch Response TouchRes

1 (Soft),

2 (Medium),

3 (Hard),

4 (Fixed)

2 (Medium)

Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in

response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Fixed) is selected,

Touch Response is off and the volume level does not change at all

regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard.

Style file

008 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn –

Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from

computer (page 23).

The Functions

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Main Voice (page 16)

009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 *

Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing

along with a Song or a Style.

010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Dual Voice (page 17)

012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Dual Voice.

013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice (page 17)

016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Split Voice.

017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effects

020 Reverb Type Reverb

1–3 (Hall 1–3)

4–5 (Room 1–2)

6–7 (Stage 1–2)

8–9 (Plate 1–2)

10 (Off)

** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 68)

021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64

Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

022 Chorus Type Chorus

1 (Chorus1)

2 (Chorus2)

3 (Chorus3)

4 (Flanger1)

5 (Flanger2)

6 (off)

** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 68)

023 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off.

024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ

1 (Speaker)

2 (Headphone)

3 (Boost)

4 (Piano)

5 (Bright)

6 (Mild)

1 (Speaker)

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum

sound in different listening situations. (page 14)

025 Wide Type Wide

1 (Wide1)

2 (Wide2)

3 (Wide3)

2 (Wide2)

Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.

Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 18)

026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 C

Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio

device to be canceled or lowered (page 30).

027 Voice Output VoiceOut

1 (Normal)

2 (Separate)

When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21) is

on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance

sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the

left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance

sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the perfor-

mance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker.

Harmony (page 19)

028

Harmony/Arpeggio

Ty pe

Harm/Arp

001–026 (Harmony)

027–176 (Arpeggio)

Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is

selected.

029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 *

Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the

Harmony types 1–5 is selected.

Arpeggio (page 19)

030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo

1 (Original)

2 (Thru)

If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume

matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original”

is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume

regardless of your playing strength.

031 Pedal Function Pdl Func

1 (Sustain)

2 (Arp Hold)

3 (Hold+Sus)

* Refer to the page 20.

Computer (page 42)

032 PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF

Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

(page 42).

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

The Functions

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.

** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio.

PC Mode (FUNCTION 032)

The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).

* An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use.

** Cannot be set independently.

MIDI

033 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the inter-

nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.

034 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal

clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-

board performance to the application software on the computer

via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.

035 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO –

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/

YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done

immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer.

Metronome (page 16)

036

Time Signature

Numerator

TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

037

Time Signature

Denominator

TimeSigD

Half note, Quarter

note, Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

** Determines the length of each metronome beat.

038 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson (page 31)

039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 01

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred

from a computer.

040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 02

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The

setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from

a computer.

041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON

This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON,

playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are play-

ing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained

regardless of the speed you are playing at.

Demo (page 27)

042 Demo Group DemoGrp

1 (Demo)

2 (Preset)

3 (User)

4 (Download)

1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group.

043 Demo Play Mode PlayMode

1 (Normal)

2 (Random)

1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode.

044 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is

set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button

is pressed.

Auto Power Off (page 14)

045 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff

OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/

120 (minutes)

30 minutes

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is

automatically turned off.

Battery (page 13)

046 Battery Type Battery

1 (Alkaline)

2 (Ni-MH)

1 (Alkaline)

Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.

Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery

Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery

Function

Number

Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions

PC1 PC2* OFF

LOCAL Off Off On

EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off

MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes

MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes

MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes

• MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs.

NOTE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad

This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument

Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard

performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/

Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer con-

nected via a USB cable. For details on using a com-

puter with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-

related Operations” (page 5) on the website.

By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument,

you can take advantage of various functions. To

make connections, prepare the i-UX1 (sold sepa-

rately), then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual” (page 5) on the website.

Backup and Initialization

The following Backup parameters will be maintained

even if the power is turned off.

In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the

data (including Style data that have not been loaded)

transferred from the connected computer will be

maintained even if you turn off the power.

You can initialize your original data via the following

two methods.

Backup Clear

This operation initializes the backup parameters.

While holding down the highest white key, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Flash Clear

This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that

have been transferred from a computer. Note that

Style data registered to Style numbers 159 will be

maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest

white key and the three highest black keys, press the

[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.

Connecting to a computer

• If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instru-

ment, you need to register it to this instrument for Style play-

back. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on

page 23.

USB cable

USB

terminal

instrumentcomputer

USB

terminal

NOTE

Data that can be transferred from a computer to

this instrument (and vice versa).

• Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1

• Style: (.sty)

• Backup File: PSR-E353.BUP *

* Backup parameters (as described below) other than

“Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred

and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a

single Backup file.

Connecting an iPhone/iPad

• This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256

Song files.

NOTE

Backup Parameters

Backup parameters

• User Songs (page 37)

• Style Number 159 (page 23)

• Registration Memory (page 39)

• Passing status of Song and Step (page 32)

• FUNCTION Settings: (page 40)

Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo,

Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel,

Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Bat-

tery Type

Initialization

• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you

have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a

computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For

details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5).

NOTICE

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-

ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from

the instrument.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or head-

phones when using the instrument with the application

on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch.

When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 033.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does

not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems

to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual

voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.

Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.

The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the

selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it

by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then

play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–

26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is neces-

sary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.

The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 034).

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

• Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-

related function.

• The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on.

The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 40 Function 001) is set to an appropri-

ate level.

Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set

the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 40 Function 006).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords

are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-

enth).

• Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-

ment based only on the root.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-

site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off

the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the included AC adaptor.

Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated

(page 14). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in

the Function settings (Function 045; page 42).

When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off

suddenly and unexpectedly.

This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power

may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly.

Appendix

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Memo

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song Book Sample

This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).

The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and

important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.

* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.

This example introduces part of the English song book.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Für Elise

Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.

The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.

In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!

First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!

Für Elise With Step Map

.......................................................................12

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” ..................................... 16

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16

First Half Review ...................................................................... 17

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18

“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18

“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19

Second Half Review ................................................................... 19

Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19

L. v. Beethoven

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Before Playing...

Sit Correctly Finger Numbering

Left Right

Sit near the middle of the keyboard.

Reading the Score

The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef

BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDEFGACC

Treble clef

Bass clef

Time Signatures and Counting Time

4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time

3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time

1 octave

2 black keys 3 black keys

Accidentals



(Sharp) Raise a semitone

B

(Flat) Lower a semitone

N

(Natural) Return to normal pitch

Key signature

Clef

Time signature

Notes and Rests

Whole note

Dotted half note

Half note

Dotted quarter note

Quarter note

Eighth note

Sixteenth note





Whole note rest

Dotted half note rest

Half note rest

Dotted quarter note rest

Quarter note rest

Eighth note rest

Sixteenth note rest

























1234

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004

Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.

Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as

you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency.

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

With Step Map

From here...

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

...to here From here...

...to here

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”

Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand.

We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the

illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get

started!

You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly.

Right

Tip-toe

ABCD

A E

Go back to the beginning and play it again.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Diligent Practice Time

Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.

The melody will be built up little by little.

Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.

Short break

Almost done

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”

And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.

It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start.

Don’t play the black keys too strongly.

Left hand

AEAE

Diligent Practice Time

Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play

smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst

phrase.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Diligent Practice Time

OK, let’s begin the second half!

You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs.

It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.

Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.

First Half Review

You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?

Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble

playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.

Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note!

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

EEE

Jump to the

next E!

And again!

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”

The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot.

Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note!

Left hand

“EEEEE!”

The only note in this step is E!

Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Left

Right

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

“Left! Right! Left! Right!”

Play “D



E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.

Have the next hand ready in position to play D



so you won’t have to rush.

Second Half Review

Try playing all the way through the second half.

As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps.

Play the Whole Song!

This is the ﬁnishing step!

Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.

Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Maximum Polyphony

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless

of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number

of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the

total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is

correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice

and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded,

earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes

have priority (last note priority).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each

voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the

instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program

Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-

gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take

this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after

the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)

is held.

NOTE

Voice List

Panel Voice List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

1 0 112 1 Grand Piano

2 0 112 2 Bright Piano

3 0 112 7 Harpsichord

4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

601133CP80

E.PIANO

7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

12 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ

14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ

15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

17 0 112 19 Rock Organ

18 0 114 19 Purple Organ

19 0 112 18 Click Organ

20 0 116 17 Bright Organ

21 0 127 19 Theater Organ

22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

25 0 112 20 Pipe Organ

26 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

29 0 113 24 Bandoneon

30 0 113 23 Modern Harp

31 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

32 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar

33 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven

34 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

35 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

36 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

37 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar

38 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

39 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

40 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

41 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

42 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

43 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

44 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass

45 0 112 34 Finger Bass

46 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

47 0 112 35 Pick Bass

48 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

49 0 112 37 Slap Bass

50 0 121 40 Funk Bass

51 0 112 39 Synth Bass

52 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

53 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

54 0 112 49 Strings

55 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

56 0 115 50 Marcato Strings

57 0 113 50 Slow Strings

58 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

59 0 112 51 Synth Strings

60 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

61 0 112 41 Violin

62 0 112 43 Cello

63 0 112 44 Contrabass

64 0 112 47 Harp

65 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

66 0 112 53 Choir

67 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

68 0 112 55 Air Choir

69 0 112 54 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

70 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax

71 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

72 0 112 66 Alto Sax

73 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

74 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

75 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

76 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble

77 0 112 72 Clarinet

78 0 112 69 Oboe

79 0 112 70 English Horn

80 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

81 0 112 57 Trumpet

82 0 112 58 Trombone

83 0 113 58 Trombone Section

84 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

85 0 112 61 French Horn

86 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

87 0 112 62 Brass Section

88 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

89 0 116 62 Octave Brass

90 0 113 63 80s Brass

91 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

92 0 115 63 Funky Brass

93 0 114 63 Techno Brass

94 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

95 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute

96 0 112 74 Flute

97 0 112 73 Piccolo

98 0 112 76 Pan Flute

99 0 112 75 Recorder

100 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH

101 0 112 81 Square Lead

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices

sound at the same time.

** Selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234 will turn on

Arpeggio.

102 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

103 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw

104 0 112 88 Under Heim

105 0 112 85 Portatone

106 0 115 82 Analogon

107 0 119 82 Fargo

108 0 112 86 Voice Lead

109 0 121 82 Funky Lead

110 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven

111 0 121 89 Dream Heaven

112 0 113 89 Symbiont

113 0 112 99 Stardust

114 0 112 101 Brightness

115 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

116 0 112 95 Equinox

117 0 112 89 Fantasia

118 0 113 90 Dark Moon

1190113101Bell Pad

120 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad

121 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance

PERCUSSION

122 0 112 12 Vibraphone

123 0 112 13 Marimba

124 0 112 14 Xylophone

125 0 112 115 Steel Drums

126 0 112 9 Celesta

127 0 112 11 Music Box

128 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

129 0 112 48 Timpani

WORLD

130 0 112 106 Banjo

13 1 0 0 111 Fidd le

132 0 0 110 Bagpipe

133 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1

134 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

135 0 96 16 Cimbalom

136 0 97 16 Santur

137 0 97 108 Kanoon

138 0 98 106 Oud

139 0 96 106 Rabab

140 0 0 109 Kalimba

141 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)

142 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)

143 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)

144 0 114 105 Tanpura

145 0 96 112 Pungi

146 0 117 74 Bansuri

147 0 0 105 Sitar 1

148 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

149 0 35 105 Sitar 2

150 0 0 112 Shehnai

151 0 97 106 Gopichant

152 0 116 117 Tabla

15 3 0 115 111 Er Hu

154 0 118 74 Di Zi

155 0 116 106 Pi Pa

156 0 113 108 Gu Zheng

157 0 40 47 Yang Qin

158 0 120 111 Morin Khuur

159 0 0 107 Shamisen

160 0 0 108 Koto

161 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

DUAL*

162 – – – Octave Piano

163 – – – Piano & Strings

164 – – – Piano Pad

165 – – – Octave Harpsichord

166 – – – Tiny Electric Piano

167 – – – Electric Piano Pad

168 – – – Full Organ

169 – – – Octave Jazz Guitar

170 – – – Octave Strings

171 – – – Orchestra Section

172 – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

173 – – – Strings Session

174 – – – Brass Tutti

175 – – – Orchestra Tutti

176 – – – Octave French Horns

177–––Octave Harp

178 – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani

179–––Octave Choir

180 – – – Jazz Brass Section

181 – – – Jazz Section

182 – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble

183–––Ballroom Brass

184 – – – Flute & Clarinet

185 – – – Trumpet & Trombone

186 – – – Fat Synth Brass

187–––Octave Lead

188 – – – Super 5th Lead

SOUND EFFECTS

189 0 0 121 Fret Noise

190 0 0 122 Breath Noise

191 0 0 123 Seashore

192 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

193 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

194 0 0 126 Helicopter

195 0 0 127 Applause

196 0 0 128 Gunshot

DRUM KITS

197 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

198 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

199 127 0 9 Room Kit

200 127 0 17 Rock Kit

201 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

202 127 0 26 Analog Kit

203 127 0 113 Dance Kit

204 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

205 127 0 41 Brush Kit

206 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

207 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.

208 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1

209 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2

210 126 0 37 Arabic Kit

211 126 0 41 Cuban Kit

212 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

213 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

214 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit

ARPEGGIO**

215 – – – Concerto

216–––Latin Rock

217 – – – Brass Section

218 – – – Piano Ballad

219 – – – Synth Sequence

220 – – – Guitarist

221 – – – Pickin'

222 – – – Spanish

223 – – – Funky Clavi

224 – – – Harpeggio

225 – – – Finger Bass Left

226 – – – Combo Jazz Left

227 – – – Paul's Bass Left

228 – – – Trance Bass Left

229 – – – Acid Bass Left

230 – – – Piano Ballad Left

231 – – – Salsa Piano Left

232 – – – Piano Arpeggio Left

233 – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left

234 – – – Strum Left

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

XGlite Voice List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

235 0 0 1 Grand Piano

236 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

237 0 40 1 Piano Strings

2380411Dream

239 0 0 2 Bright Piano

240 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

241 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

242 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

243 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

244 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

245 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

246 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

247 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

248 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

249 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

250 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

251 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

252 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

253 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1

254 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

255 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2

256 0 0 8 Clavi

257 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

XG CHROMATIC

258 0 0 9 Celesta

259 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

260 0 0 11 Music Box 1

261 0 64 11 Music Box 2

262 0 0 12 Vibraphone

263 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

264 0 0 13 Marimba

265 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

266 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

267 0 97 13 Balimba

268 0 98 13 Log Drums

269 0 0 14 Xylophone

270 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

271 0 96 15 Church Bells

272 0 97 15 Carillon

XG ORGAN

273 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1

274 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

275 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1

276 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2

277 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1

278 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3

279 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ

280 0 64 17 Organ Bass

281 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2

282 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

283 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2

284 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1

285 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ

286 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

287 0 33 18 Light Organ

288 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

289 0 0 19 Rock Organ

290 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

291 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ

292 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ

293 0 0 20 Church Organ 1

294 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

295 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

296 0 40 20 Notre Dame

297 0 64 20 Organ Flute

298 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

299 0 0 21 Reed Organ

300 0 40 21 Puff Organ

301 0 0 22 Accordion

302 0 0 23 Harmonica 1

303 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

304 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1

305 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

306 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1

307 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3

308 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

309 0 96 25 Ukulele

310 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

311 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

312 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

313 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

314 0 96 26 Mandolin

315 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

316 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

317 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

318 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

319 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

320 0 40 29 Funk Guitar

321 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

322 0 45 29 Jazz Man

323 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

324 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

325 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

326 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1

327 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

328 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1

329 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

330 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

XG BASS

331 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

332 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

333 0 45 33

Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

334 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1

335 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark

336 0 40 34

Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

337 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

338 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

339 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

340 0 0 35 Pick Bass

341 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

342 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1

343 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

344 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

345 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

346 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

347 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

348 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

349 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

350 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

351 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

352 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

353 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

354 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

355 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

356 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

357 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

358 0 41 40 DX Bass

XG STRINGS

359 0 0 41 Violin

360 0 8 41 Slow Violin

361 0 0 42 Viola

362 0 0 43 Cello

363 0 0 44 Contrabass

364 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

365 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

366 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

367 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

368 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

369 0 0 48 Timpani

XG ENSEMBLE

370 0 0 49 Strings 1

371 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

372 0 8 49 Slow Strings

373 0 35 49 60s Strings

374 0 40 49 Orchestra 1

375 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

376 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

377 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

378 0 0 50 Strings 2

379 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

380 0 8 50 Legato Strings

381 0 40 50 Warm Strings

382 0 41 50 Kingdom

383 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

384 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4

385 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

386 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

387 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

388 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

389 0 40 53 Choir Strings

390 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

391 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1

392 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

393 0 41 55 Choral

394 0 64 55 Analog Voice

395 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1

396 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

397 0 64 56 Impact

XG BRASS

398 0 0 57 Trumpet

399 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

400 0 0 58 Trombone 1

401 0 18 58 Trombone 2

402 0 0 59 Tuba

403 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

404 0 0 61 French Horn 1

405 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

406 0 32 61 French Horn 2

407 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

408 0 0 62 Brass Section

409 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

410 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

411 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

412 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

413 0 18 64 Soft Brass

414 0 41 64 Choir Brass

XG REED

415 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

416 0 0 66 Alto Sax

417 0 40 66 Sax Section

418 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

419 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

420 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

421 0 0 69 Oboe

422 0 0 70 English Horn

423 0 0 71 Bassoon

424 0 0 72 Clarinet

XG PIPE

425 0 0 73 Piccolo

426 0 0 74 Flute

427 0 0 75 Recorder

428 0 0 76 Pan Flute

429 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

430 0 0 79 Whistle

431 0 0 80 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

432 0 0 81 Square Lead 1

433 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

434 0 8 81 LM Square

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

435 0 18 81 Hollow

436 0 19 81 Shroud

437 0 64 81 Mellow

438 0 65 81 Solo Sine

439 0 66 81 Sine Lead

440 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1

441 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

442 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

443 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

444 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

445 0 20 82 Big Lead

446 0 24 82 Heavy Synth

447 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

448 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

449 0 65 83 Pure Lead

450 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

451 0 0 85 Charang Lead

452 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

453 0 0 86 Voice Lead

454 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

455 0 35 87 Big Five

456 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

457 0 16 88 Big & Low

458 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

459 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

460 0 0 89 New Age Pad

461 0 64 89 Fantasy

462 0 0 90 Warm Pad

463 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

464 0 0 92 Choir Pad

465 0 66 92 Itopia

466 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

467 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

468 0 0 95 Halo Pad

469 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

470 0 0 97 Rain

471 0 64 97 Harmo Rain

472 0 65 97 African Wind

473 0 66 97 Carib

474 0 0 98 Sound Track

475 0 27 98 Prologue

476 0 0 99 Crystal

477 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

478 0 14 99 Popcorn

479 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

480 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

481 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

482 0 41 99 Clear Bells

483 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

484 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

485 0 70 99 Air Bells

486 0 71 99 Bell Harp

487 0 72 99 Gamelimba

488 0 0 100 Atmosphere

489 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

490 0 19 100 Hollow Release

491 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

492 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

493 0 65 100 Harp Vox

494 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

495 0 0 101 Brightness

496 0 0 102 Goblins

497 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

498 0 65 102 Creeper

499 0 67 102 Ritual

500 0 68 102 To Heaven

501 0 70 102 Night

502 0 71 102 Glisten

503 0 96 102 Bell Choir

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

504 0 0 103 Echoes

505 0 65 103 Big Pan

506 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

XG WORLD

507 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

508 0 97 105 Tamboura

509 0 0 106 Banjo

510 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

XG PERCUSSIVE

511 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

512 0 96 113 Bonang

513 0 97 113 Altair

514 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

515 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

516 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

517 0 0 114 Agogo

518 0 0 115 Steel Drums

519 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

520 0 98 115 Thai Bells

521 0 0 116 Woodblock

522 0 96 116 Castanets

523 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

524 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

525 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1

526 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

527 0 65 118 Real Tom

528 0 66 118 Rock Tom

529 0 0 119 Synth Drum

530 0 64 119 Analog Tom

531 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

532 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

533 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1

534 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

535 64 0 4 String Slap

536 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

537 64 0 33 Shower

538 64 0 34 Thunder

539 64 0 35 Wind

540 64 0 36 Stream

541 64 0 37 Bubble

542 64 0 38 Feed

543 64 0 49 Dog

544 64 0 50 Horse

545 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

546 64 0 56 Maou

547 64 0 65 Phone Call

548 64 0 66 Door Squeak

549 64 0 67 Door Slam

550 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

551 64 0 69 Scratch Split

552 64 0 70 Wind Chime

553 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

554 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

555 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

556 64 0 83 Car Passing

557 64 0 84 Car Crash

558 64 0 85 Siren

559 64 0 86 Train

560 64 0 87 Jet Plane

561 64 0 88 Starship

562 64 0 89 Burst

563 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

564 64 0 91 Submarine

565 64 0 97 Laugh

566 64 0 98 Scream

567 64 0 99 Punch

568 64 0 100 Heartbeat

569 64 0 101 Footsteps

570 64 0 113 Machine Gun

571 64 0 114 Laser Gun

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

572 64 0 115 Explosion

573 64 0 116 Firework

Voic e

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “197: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”

(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

Voice No. 197 198 199 200 201 202

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2

Snare Rock H Snare L Snare Rock H

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Analog L

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2

Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog H

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick

Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Analog Snare 1

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Snare Rock Rim Snare Rock H Analog Snare 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L

Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 Electronic Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed

Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H

Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 1Hi-Hat Pedal

Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom

Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open

Analog Hi-Hat Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L

Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 Electronic Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H

Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom

Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Voice No. 203 204 205 206 207 208

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128 126/000/040

Keyboard MIDI

Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit

StdKit1 +

Chinese Perc.

Indian Kit 1

Note#NoteNote#Note

25 C# 013C# -1

26 D 0 14 D -1

27 D# 015D# -1

28 E 0 16 E -1

29 F 0 17 F -1

30 F# 018F# -1

31 G 0 19 G -1

32 G# 020G# -1

33 A 0 21 A -1

34 A# 022A# -1 Hateli Long

35 B 0 23 B -1

Hateli Short

36 C 1 24 C 0

Baya ge

37 C# 125C# 0

Baya ke

38 D 1 26 D 0

Baya ghe

39 D# 127D# 0

Baya ka

40 E 1 28 E 0 Reverse Cymbal

Tabla na

41 F 1 29 F 0

Ta bl a ti n

42 F# 130F# 0Hi Q 2

Tablabaya dha

43 G 1 31 G 0 Analog Snare Snappy Snare Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

Ta bl a tu n

44 G# 132G# 0

Tablabaya dhin

45 A 1 33 A 0

Analog Bass Drum Dance 1

Bass Drum L Tabla di

46 A# 134A# 0 Analog Snare Open Rim

Tablabaya dhe

47 B 1 35 B 0

Analog Bass Drum Dance 2

Gran Cassa Ta bl a ti

48 C 2 36 C 1

Analog Bass Drum Dance 3

Bass Drum Jazz Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Tabla ne

49 C# 237C# 1 Analog Side Stick

Ta bl a ta ra n

50 D 2 38 D 1 Analog Snare Q Snare Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Snare M

Ta bl a ta k

51 D# 239D# 1

Chipri

52 E 2 40 E 1 Analog Snare + Acoustic Snare Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Snare H

Kanjira Open

53 F 2 41 F 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1

Kanjira Slap

54 F# 242F# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3

Kanjira Mute

55 G 2 43 G 1 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2

Kanjira Bend up

56 G# 244G# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4

Kanjira Bend down

57 A 2 45 A 1 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3

Dholak Open

58 A# 246A# 1 Analog Hi-Hat Open 2

Dholak Mute

59 B 2 47 B 1 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4

Dholak Slap

60 C 3 48 C 2 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5

Dhol Open

61 C# 349C# 2 Analog Cymbal

Hand Cymbal L Dhol Mute

62 D 3 50 D 2 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6

Dhol Slap

63 D# 351D# 2

Hand Cymbal Short L

Dhol Slide

64 E 3 52 E 2

Mridangam Normal

65 F 3 53 F 2

Mridangam Open

66 F# 354F# 2

Mridangam Mute

67 G 3 55 G 2

Mridangam Slap

68 G# 356G# 2 Analog Cowbell

Mridangam Rim

69 A 3 57 A 2

Hand Cymbal H Chimta Open

70 A# 358A# 2

Chimta Normal

71 B 3 59 B 2

Hand Cymbal Short H

Chimta Ring

72 C 4 60 C 3

Dholki Open

73 C# 461C# 3

Dholki Mute

74 D 4 62 D 3 Analog Conga H

Dholki Slap

75 D# 463D# 3 Analog Conga M

Dholki Slide

76 E 4 64 E 3 Analog Conga L

Dholki Rim

77 F 4 65 F 3

Khol Open

78 F# 466F# 3

Khol Slide

79 G 4 67 G 3

Dagu Mute Khol Mute

80 G# 468G# 3

Zhongcha Mute Manjira Open

81 A 4 69 A 3

Dagu Heavy Manjira Close

82 A# 470A# 3 Analog Maracas

Zhongcha Open Jhanji Open

83 B 4 71 B 3

Paigu Middle Jhanji Close

84 C 5 72 C 4

Paigu Low Mondira Open

85 C# 573C# 4

Xiaocha Mute Mondira Close

86 D 5 74 D 4

Bangu Mridang Open

87 D# 575D# 4 Analog Claves

Xiaocha Open Mridang Mute

88 E 5 76 E 4

Bangzi Mridang Rim

89 F 5 77 F 4

Muyu Low Mridang Slide

90 F# 578F# 4 Scratch Push

Zhongluo Mute Khomokh Normal

91 G 5 79 G 4 Scratch Pull

Muyu Mid-Low Khomokh Mute

92 G# 580G# 4

Zhongluo Open Khomokh Mltatk

93 A 5 81 A 4

Muyu Middle Madal-A2

94 A# 582A# 4

Xiaoluo Open Madal-A#2

95 B 5 83 B 4

Triangle Mute Madal-B2

96 C 6 84 C 5

Triangle Open Madal-C3

97 C# 685C# 5 Madal-C#3

98 D 6 86 D 5 Madal-D3

99 D# 687D# 5 Madal-D#3

100 E 6 88 E 5 Madal-E3

101 F 6 89 F 5 Madal-F3

102 F# 690F# 5 Madal-F#3

103 G 6 91 G 5 Madal-G3

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

209 210 211 212 213 214

126/000/115 126/000/037 126/000/041 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113

Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit

Zarb Back mf

Zarb Tom f

Indian Hand Clap Zarb Eshareh

Dafli Open Zarb Whipping

Dafli Slap Tombak Tom f

Dafli Rim Neghareh Tom f

Duff Open Tombak Back f

Duff Slap Neghareh Back f

Duff Rim Tombak Snap f

Hatheli Long Neghareh Pelang f Conga H Tip

Hatheli Short Tombak Trill Conga H Heel

Baya ge Khaligi Clap 1 Conga H Open

Drum Loop

Baya ke Arabic Zalgouta Open Conga H Mute

Baya ghe Khaligi Clap 2 Conga H Slap Open

Baya ka Arabic Zalgouta Close Conga H Slap

Tabla na Arabic Hand Clap Conga H Slap Mute

Tabla tin Tabel Tak 1 Conga L Tip

Tablabaya dha Sagat 1 Conga L Heel

Dhol 1 Open Tabel Dom Conga L Open

Dhol 1 Slap Sagat 2 Conga L Mute

Dhol 1 Mute Tabel Tak 2 Conga L Slap Open

Dhol 1 Open Slap Sagat 3 Conga L Slap

Dhol 1 Roll Riq Tik 3 Conga L Slide

Dandia Short Riq Tik 2 Bongo H Open 1 finger Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat

Dandia Long Riq Tik Hard 1 Bongo H Open 3 finger Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps

Chutki Riq Tik 1 Bongo H Rim Door Slam Door Squeak

Chipri Riq Tik Hard 2 Bongo H Tip String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam

Khanjira Open Riq Tik Hard 3 Bongo H Heel Scratch Split Applause

Khanjira Slap Riq Tish Bongo H Slap Wind Chime Camera

Khanjira Mute Riq Snouj 2 Bongo L Open 1 finger Telephone Ring 2 Horn

Khanjira Bendup Riq Roll Bongo L Open 3 finger Hiccup

Khanjira Benddown Riq Snouj 1 Bongo L Rim Cuckoo Clock

Dholak 1 Open Riq Sak Bongo L Tip Stream

Dholak 1 Mute Riq Snouj 3 Bongo L Heel Frog

Dholak 1 Slap Riq Snouj 4 Bongo L Slap Rooster

Dhol 2 Open Riq Tak 1 Timbale L Open Dog

Dhol 2 Slap Riq Brass 1 Cat

Dhol 2 Rim Riq Tak 2 Owl

Mridangam na Riq Brass 2 Horse Gallop

Mridangam din Riq Dom Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh

Mridangam ki Katem Tak Doff Paila L Car Tires Squeal Cow

Mridangam ta Katem Dom Timbale H Open Car Passing Lion

Mridangam Chapu Katem Sak 1 Car Crash Scratch

Mridangam Lo Closed Katem Tak 1 Siren Yo!

Mridangam Lo Open Katem Sak 2 Train Go!

Chimta Normal Katem Tak 2 Jet Plane Get up!

Chimta Ring Daholla Sak 2 Paila H Starship Whoow!

Dholki Hi Open Daholla Sak 1 Cowbell Top Burst

Huuaah!

Dholki Hi Mute Daholla Tak 1 Roller Coaster

Dholki Lo Open Daholla Dom Submarine

Dholki Hi Slap Daholla Tak 2

Dholki Lo Slide Tablah Prok Guiro Short

Khol Open Tablah Dom 2 Guiro Long

Khol slide Tablah Roll of Edge

Khol Mute Tablah Tak Finger 4

Manjira Open Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tambourine Shower Laugh

Manjira Close Tablah Tak Finger 3 Thunder Scream

Jhanji Open Tablah Tak Trill 2 Wind Punch

Jhanji Close Tablah Tak Finger 2 Stream Heartbeat

Mondira Open Tablah Tak Finger 1 Maracas Bubble Footsteps

Uh!+Hit

Mondira Close Tablah Tik 2 Shaker Feed

Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Tablah Tik 4 Cabasa

Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Tablah Tik 3

Indian Bhangra Scat 3 Tablah Tik 1

indian Bhangra Scat 4 Tablah Tak 3

Khomokh Normal Tablah Tak 1

Khomokh Mute Tablah Tak 4

Khomokh mltatk Tablah Tak 2

Thavil Open Tablah Sak 2

Thavil Slap Tablah Tremolo

Thavil Mute Tablah Sak 1

Khartaal Tablah Dom 1 Dog Machine Gun

Dholak 2 Open Horse Laser Gun Applause 1

Dholak 2 Slide Bird Tweet 2 Explosion Applause 2

Dholak 2 Rim 1 Firework Applause 3

Dholak 2 Rim 2 Applause 4

Dholak 2 Ring

Dholak 2 Slap

Maou

* Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Song List

• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book,

complete the user registration at the following website.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Song No. Song Name

Top Picks

001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)

002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)

003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)

Learn to Play

004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)

007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)

008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)

009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)

010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)

013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)

014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)

015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)

016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)

017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)

018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)

019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)

Favorite

020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)

021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)

022 Aura Lee (Traditional)

023 London Bridge (Traditional)

024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)

025 Nedelka (Traditional)

026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)

027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)

028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)

029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)

030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)

031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)

032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)

033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)

034 Greensleeves (Traditional)

035 Kalinka (Traditional)

036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)

037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)

038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)

039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)

040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)

041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)

042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)

043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)

044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)

045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)

046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)

047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)

048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)

049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)

050

Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvo

ák)

Favorite with Style

051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)

052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)

053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)

054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)

055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)

056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)

057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)

058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)

059 Red River Valley (Traditional)

060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)

061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)

062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)

063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)

064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)

065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)

066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)

067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)

068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)

069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)

070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)

Instrument Master

071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)

072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)

074

Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)

076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)

077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)

078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)

079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)

Piano Repertoire

080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)

081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)

082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)

083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)

084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)

085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)

086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)

087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)

088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)

089

Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)

090

Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)

091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)

092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)

093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)

094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)

095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)

096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)

097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)

098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)

099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)

100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)

101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)

102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)

Song No. Special Appendix

Chord Study

103–114 ChdStd01–ChdStd12

Chord Progression

115–154 Maj1234–min1736

Song No. Song Name

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8BEAT

1BritPopRock

2 8BeatModern

3 Cool8Beat

4 StadiumRock

5 70sRock

6 HardRock1

7 60sGuitarPop

8 8BeatAdria

9 60s8Beat

10 8Beat

11 OffBeat

12 Folkrock

13 60sRock

14 HardRock2

15 RockShuffle

16 8BeatRock

16BEAT

17 16Beat

18 PopShuffle

19 GuitarPop

20 16BeatUptempo

21 KoolShuffle

22 HipHopLight

BALLAD

23 70sGlamPiano

24 PianoBallad

25 LoveSong

26 6/8ModernEP

27 6/8SlowRock

28 OrganBallad

29 PopBallad

30 16BeatBallad

DANCE

31 ClubBeat

32 Electronica

33 FunkyHouse

34 RetroClub

35 USHipHop

36 MellowHipHop

37 Chillout

38 EuroTrance

39 Ibiza

40 SwingHouse

41 Clubdance

42 ClubLatin

43 Garage1

44 Garage2

45 TechnoParty

46 UKPop

47 HipHopGroove

48 HipShuffle

49 HipHopPop

DISCO

50 ModernDisco

51 70sDisco

52 LatinDisco

53 SaturdayNight

54 DiscoHands

SWING&JAZZ

55 BigBandFast

56 BigBandBallad

57 AcousticJazz

58 AcidJazz

59 JazzClub

60 Swing1

61 Swing2

62 Five/Four

63 Dixieland

64 Ragtime

R&B

65 BluesRock

66 Soul

67 DetroitPop

68 60sRock&Roll

69 6/8Soul

70 CrocoTwist

71 Rock&Roll

72 ComboBoogie

73 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

74 CountryPop

75 CountrySwing

76 Country2/4

77 Bluegrass

LATIN

78 BrazilianSamba

79 BossaNova

80 Forro

81 Sertanejo1

82 Sertanejo2

83 Baião

84 Joropo

85 Parranda

86 Reggaeton

87 Tijuana

88 PasoDuranguense

89 CumbiaGrupera

90 BaladaBanda

91 MexicanMambo

92 Mambo

93 Salsa

94 Beguine

95 Reggae

WORLD

96 ScottishReel

97 4/4Standart

98 Rumba2/4

99 Saeidy

100 WehdaSaghira

101 IranianElec

102 Emarati

103 AfricanGospelReggae

104 HighLife

105 IndianPop

106 Bhangra

107 Bhajan

108 BollyMix

109 Tamil

110 Kerala

111 GoanPop

112 Rajasthan

Style No. Style Name

113 Dandiya

114 Q aw wa li

115 FolkHills

116 ModernDangdut

117 Keroncong

118 XiQingLuoGu

119 YiZuMinGe

120 JingJuJieZou

BALLROOM

121 VienneseWaltz

122 EnglishWaltz

123 Slowfox

124 Foxtrot

125 Quickstep

126 Tango

127 Pasodoble

128 Samba

129 ChaChaCha

130 Rumba

131 Jive

TRADITIONAL

132 USMarch

133 6/8March

134 GermanMarch

135 PolkaPop

136 OberPolka

137 Tarantella

138 Showtune

139 ChristmasSwing

140 ChristmasWaltz

WALTZ

141 SwingWaltz

142 JazzWaltz

143 ValsMexicano

144 CountryWaltz

145 OberkrainerWalzer

146 Musette

CHILDREN

147 Learning2/4

148 Learning4/4

149 Learning6/8

PIANIST

150 Stride

151 PianoSwing

152 PianoBoogie

153 Arpeggio

154 Habanera

155 SlowRock

156 8BeatPianoBallad

157 6/8PianoMarch

158 PianoWaltz

Style No. Style Name

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Music Database List

MDB No. MDB Name

POP

1AlvFever

2DayPdise

3 GoMyWay

4 HowDeep!

5 HurryLuv

6 Imagine

7JustCall

8 SultanSw

9WhitePle

10 YesterBd

ROCK

11 JumpRock

12 PickUpPc

13 RdRiverR

14 SatsfyRk

15 Sheriff

16 SmokeWtr

17 TwistAgn

18 VenusPop

DANCE

19 2 of Us

20 B Leave

21 Back St

22 Crockett

23 FunkyTwn

24 KillSoft

25 Nine PM

26 SingBack

27 StrandD

BALLAD

28 AdelineB

29 CatMemry

30 ElvGhett

31 Feeling

32 Mn Rivr

33 OnMyMnd

34 OverRbow

35 ReleseMe

36 SavingLv

37 SmokyEye

38 WhisprBd

R & B

39 AmazingG

40 BoogiePf

41 Clock Rk

42 CU later

43 HappyDay

44 RisingSn

45 ShookUp

46 TeddyBer

SWING & JAZZ

47 ChooChoo

48 HighMoon

49 InMood

50 MistyBld

51 MoonLit

52 New York

53 SaintMch

54 ShearJz

55 TstHoney

56 USPatrol

EASY LISTENING

57 Close2U

58 Entrtain

59 LuvStory

60 MyPrince

61 PupetStr

62 Raindrop

63 R'ticGtr

64 SingRain

65 SmallWld

66 SpkSoft

67 StrangeN

68 TimeGoes

69 WhteXmas

70 WishStar

71 WondrWld

LATIN

72 BambaLa

73 BeHappy!

74 CopaLola

75 DayNight

76 Ipanema

77 MuchoBgn

78 Sunshine

79 TicoSmb

80 WaveBosa

COUNTRY

81 BoxerGtr

82 CntryRds

83 Jambala

84 TopWorld

85 YlwRose

BALLROOM

86 BrazilBr

87 CheryApl

88 DanubeWv

89 TangoAc

90 Tea4Two

TRADITIONAL

91 CampRace

MDB No. MDB Name

92 CielPari

93 GrndClok

94 JinglBel

95 MickMrch

96 Showbiz

97 StarMrch

98 WashPost

99 SilentNt

100 YankDood

MDB No. MDB Name

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Effect Type List

Harmony Types

No. Harmony Type Description

001 Duet

If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while

playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three

notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that

includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.

002 Trio

003 Block

004 Country

005 Octave

006 Trill 1/4 note

If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.

007 Trill 1/6 note

008 Trill 1/8 note

009 Trill 1/12 note

010 Trill 1/16 note

011 Trill 1/24 note

012 Trill 1/32 note

013 Tremolo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.

(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)

014 Tremolo 1/6 note

015 Tremolo 1/8 note

016 Tremolo 1/12 note

017 Tremolo 1/16 note

018 Tremolo 1/24 note

019 Tremolo 1/32 note

020 Echo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.

(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)

021 Echo 1/6 note

022 Echo 1/8 note

023 Echo 1/12 note

024 Echo 1/16 note

025 Echo 1/24 note

026 Echo 1/32 note

Arpeggio Type List

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

027 UpOct

028 DownOct

029 UpDwnOct

030 SynArp1

031 SynArp2

032 SynArp3

033 SynArp4

034 SyncEcho

035 PulsLine

036 StepLine

037 Random

038 Down&Up

039 SuperArp

040 AcidLine

041 TekEcho

042 VelGruv

043 Planet

044 Trance1

045 Trance2

046 Trance3

047 ChordAlt

048 SynChrd1

049 SynChrd2

050 Syncopa

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

051 Hybrid1

052 Hybrid2

053 Hybrid3

054 Hybrid4

055 Hybrid5

056 PfArp1

057 PfArp2

058 PfArp3

059 PfArp4

060 PfClub1

061 PfClub2

062 PfBallad

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

Effect Type List

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

063 PfChd8th

064 EPArp

065 PfShufle

066 PfRock

067 Clavi1

068 Clavi2

069 RocknPf

070 70RockPf

071 SlowflPf

072 SoulPf

073 ChordUp

074 ChdDance

075 LatinRck

076 Salsa1

077 Salsa2

078 Reggae1

079 Reggae2

080 Reggae3

081 6/8R&B

082 Gospel

083 BalladEP

084 Strum1

085 Strum2

086 Strum3

087 Strum4

088 Pickin1

089 Pickin2

090 Funky

091 GtrChrd1

092 GtrChrd2

093 GtrChrd3

094 GtrArp

095 FngrPck1

096 FngrPck2

097 CleanGtr

098 Slowfl

099 Samba1

100 Samba2

101 Spanish1

102 Spanish2

103 Harp1

104 Harp2

105 FngrBas1

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

106 FngrBas2

107 FngrBas3

108 CoolFunk

109 SlapBass

110 AcidBas1

111 Ac i d Bas 2

112 FunkyB a s

113 CmbJazB1

114 CmbJazB2

115 CmbJazB3

116 NewR&BBs

117 HipHopBs

118 S moothBs

119 D re a mBas

120 TranceBs

121 LatinBas

122 Strings1

123 Strings2

124 Strings3

125 Strings4

126 StrngDwn

127 StrngUp

128 OrcheStr

129 Jupiter

130 Pizz1

131 Pizz2

132 BrasSec1

133 BrasSec2

134 BrasSec3

135 FunkBras

136 SoulReed

137 DiscoLd

138 SmoothPd

139 PercArp

140 Ethnic

141 Cresendo

142 DiscoCP

143 Perc1

144 Perc2

145 R&B

146 Funk1

147 Funk2

148 Funk3

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

149 Soul

150 ClscHip

151 Smooth

152 NewGospl

153 CmbJazz1

154 CmbJazz2

155 Bebop

156 JazzHop

157 FolkRock

158 Unpluggd

159 HipHop

160 Trance

161 Dream

162 2 Step

163 ClubHs1

164 ClubHs2

165 EuroTek

166 House

167 Ibiza1

168 Ibiza2

169 Ibiza3

170 Garage

171 Samba

172 African

173 Latin

174 China

175 Indian

176 Arabic

Arpeggio No. Arpeggio Name

Reverb Types

Chorus Types

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–03 Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

04–05 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.

06 Off No effect.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Specifications

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product,

this manual may not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the

manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha

dealer.

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H) 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”)

Weight 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.)

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61

Touch Response Yes

Display

Type LCD display

Backlight Yes

Language English

Voices

Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32

Preset Number of Voices

196 panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices

Compatibility GM/XGlite

Effects

Types

Reverb 9 types

Chorus 5 types

Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types

Master EQ 6 types

Harmony 26 types

Arpeggio 150 types

Functions

Melody Suppressor (for AUX IN)

Ye s

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Panel Sustain Yes

Accompaniment

Styles

Preset

Number of Preset Styles 158

Fingering Multi finger

Style Control

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,

MAIN/AUTO FILL

External Styles Yes

Other Features

Music Database 100

One Touch Setting Yes

Recording/Playback

(MIDI data only;

audio not sup-

ported.)

Preset Number of Preset Songs 154 (including Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 40)

Recording

Number of Songs 5

Number of Tracks 2

Data Capacity Approx. 10,000 notes

Compatible Data

Format

Playback SMF Formats 0 & 1

Recording Original File Format

Function

Lesson/Guide

[KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING],

[PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY],[CHORD

PROGRESSION]

Registration Number of Buttons 9

Overall

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 11–280

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)

Duo Yes

Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes

Memory/

Connectivity

Memory Internal Memory Approx. 1.7MB

Connectivity

USB TO HOST Yes

DC IN DC IN 12V

Headphones/Output [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1

Sustain Pedal [SUSTAIN] x 1

AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Yes

Amplifiers/Speakers

Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers 12cm x 2

Power Supply

Adaptor

Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

Batteries

Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable

batteries

Power Consumption 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor)

Auto Power Off Function Yes

Accessories

Included Accessories

•Music rest

• Owner’s Manual

• AC adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

• Online Member Product Registration

* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• AC adaptor:

Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

• Keyboard stand: L-2C

• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30

• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5

• USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Index

A-B Repeat ................................29

AC Adaptor

................................12

ACMP

........................................22

Arpeggio

....................................19

Arpeggio Velocity

................20, 41

Auto Accompaniment

................22

AUTO FILL

................................24

Auto Power Off

....................14, 42

AUX IN

...................................... 11

AUX IN Volume

.........................40

Backup ......................................43

Backup Clear

.............................43

Backup Parameter

.....................43

battery

.......................................12

Battery Type

..............................42

Beat

...........................................15

BGM

..........................................28

Chord ........................................15

Chord Dictionary

.......................26

Chord Progression

.....................36

Chord Study

..............................35

Chord Type

................................25

Chorus

.......................................18

Chorus Type

........................41, 68

computer

...................................43

Computer-related Operations

......5

Demo .........................................27

Demo Cancel

............................42

Demo Group

..............................42

Demo Play Mode

.......................42

Display

......................................15

Drum Kit List

..............................61

Dual Voice

........................... 17, 41

Duo

............................................21

Effect ...................................18, 41

Effect Type List

..........................67

ENDING

....................................24

EQ Setting

.................................14

EQ type

.....................................14

External Clock

...........................42

Fast Forward .............................28

Fast Reverse

.............................28

Flash Clear

................................43

Footswitch

.................................13

Function

.....................................40

Function List

..............................40

GM System Level 1 ..................... 5

Grade

........................................33

Grand Piano

.............................. 16

Harmony ................................... 19

Harmony Type

........................... 41

Harmony Volume

................ 20, 41

Headphone

............................... 13

Initial Send ................................42

Initialization

...............................43

INTRO

....................................... 24

iPad

........................................... 43

iPhone

.......................................43

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual

i-UX1

.........................................43

Keyboard Display ...................... 15

Keys To Success

....................... 31

Lesson ......................................31

Listening

.............................. 31, 33

Local Control

.............................42

MAIN .........................................24

Main Voice

.......................... 16, 41

Master EQ Type

........................41

Measure

.................................... 15

Melody Suppressor

................... 30

Metronome

................................ 16

Metronome Volume

............. 16, 42

MIDI Basics

................................. 5

MIDI Reference

...........................5

Music Database

........................ 23

Music Database List

..................66

Music Rest

............................ 5, 13

Musicsoft Downloader

...............23

Notation .................................... 15

One Touch Setting .................... 16

Panel Sustain ...................... 18, 41

Part

...........................................29

Passing Status

..........................32

Pause

........................................ 28

PC Mode

............................. 41, 42

Pedal Function

.......................... 41

Phrase Repeat

.................... 31, 34

Playback

...................................28

Power Requirements

................. 12

Random .................................... 28

Recording Data Capacity

.......... 37

Registration Memory

................ 39

Reverb

...................................... 18

Reverb Level

............................. 41

Reverb Type

........................ 41, 68

rhythm

....................................... 22

rit.

.............................................. 24

Section ...................................... 24

Song

......................................... 27

Song Book

............................ 5, 31

Song Book Sample

................... 46

Song Category

.......................... 27

Song List

................................... 64

Song Volume

...................... 27, 40

Specifications

........................... 69

Split

........................................... 17

Split Point

.......................17, 22, 40

Split Voice

............................17, 41

Style

......................................... 22

STYLE FILE

................................ 5

Style List

................................... 65

Style Register

........................... 40

Style Volume

....................... 22, 40

SUSTAIN

.................................. 13

Sustain

...........................18, 21, 41

Synchro Start

............................ 22

Tap ............................................ 24

Temp o

..................................16, 24

Time Signature

....................16, 42

Timing

................................. 31, 33

Touch Response

......................... 5

Touch Sensitivity

..................14, 40

Tra ck

......................................... 37

Transpose

................................. 40

Troubleshooting

........................ 44

Tuning

....................................... 40

Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 18

USB

............................................ 5

USB TO HOST

..........................11

User Song

................................. 37

Voice ......................................... 16

Voice List

.................................. 56

Waiting ................................ 31, 33

Wide Type

................................. 41

XGlite .......................................... 5

Yo u r Te m p o ............................... 42

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Plug

Fiche

Enchufe

Stecker

Plugue

Вилка

Slide the plug as indicated

Faites glisser la fiche en suivant les indications

Deslice el enchufe tal como se indica.

Stecker wie angegeben einschieben

Deslize o plugue conforme indicado

Надвиньте вилку, как показано на рисунке

* The shape of the plug differs depending on locale.

* La forme de la fiche varie selon le pays.

* La forma del enchufe varía según la región.

* Die Form des Steckers variiert je nach Land.

* O formato do plugue varia de acordo com a localidade.

* В разных странах штепсельные вилки отличаются по форме.

For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug

Do not remove the plug from the power

adaptor. If the plug is removed accidentally,

slide the plug into place without touching the

metallic parts, and then push the plug in completely

until it clicks.

Adaptateur secteur avec fiche amovible

Ne retirez pas la fiche de l'adaptateur secteur.

Si la fiche est retirée accidentellement,

remettez-la en place sans toucher les parties

métalliques et faites-la glisser complètement jusqu'à

ce qu'un déclic se produise.

Para el adaptador de alimentación con un

enchufe extraíble

No retire el enchufe del adaptador de

alimentación. Si el enchufe se retira por

accidente, vuelva a colocarlo en su lugar sin

tocar los componentes metálicos y, a continuación,

enchúfelo del todo hasta que se oiga un clic.

Für den Netzadapter mit abziehbarem Stecker

Ziehen Sie den Stecker nicht vom Netzadapter

ab. Sollte der Stecker unabsichtlich entfernt

werden, schieben Sie den Stecker wieder

hinein, ohne die Metallteile zu berühren, und drücken

Sie ihn dann vollständig hinein, bis er einrastet.

Para o adaptador de alimentação com plugue

removível

Não remova o plugue do adaptador de

alimentação. Se o plugue for removido

acidentalmente, encaixe-o sem tocar nas

partes metálicas e, em seguida, empurre-o para

dentro completamente até ouvir um clique.

Для адаптера питания со съемной вилкой

Не снимайте вилку с адаптера питания.

Если вилка была снята случайно,

надвиньте вилку на место, не прикасаясь к

металлическим частям, и наденьте ее полностью,

до щелчка.

• Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor.

Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.

• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug.

To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be

careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and

plug.

• Assurez-vous que la fiche reste fixée à l'adaptateur secteur.

L'utilisation de la fiche seule risque de provoquer des

électrocutions ou des incendies.

• Ne touchez jamais la partie métallique lorsque vous

insérez la fiche. Afin d'éviter les risques d'électrocution,

courts-circuits ou incidents, veillez également à ce que

l'adaptateur secteur et la fiche ne soient pas encrassés par

la poussière.

• Asegúrese de mantener el enchufe conectado al

adaptador de CA. Si se utiliza el enchufe solo, se puede

producir una descarga eléctrica o un incendio.

• No toque nunca la sección metálica al conectar el

enchufe. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, cortocircuitos o

daños, fíjese en que no haya polvo entre el adaptador de

CA y el enchufe.

WARNING

AVERTISSEMENT

ADVERTENCIA

• Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Stecker am Netzadapter

anschlossen bleibt. Die Verwendung des Steckers alleine

kann zu elektrischen Schlägen oder einem Brand führen.

• Berühren Sie bitte niemals den Metallabschnitt, wenn Sie

den Stecker befestigen. Um elektrische Schläge,

Kurzschlüsse oder Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, achten

Sie bitte darauf, dass sich zwischen Netzadapter und

Stecker kein Staub angesammelt hat.

• Sempre mantenha o plugue conectado ao adaptador CA.

O uso do plugue sozinho pode causar choque elétrico ou

incêndio.

• Nunca toque na parte metálica ao conectar o plugue. Para

evitar choque elétrico, curto-circuito ou danos, também

tome cuidado para que não haja poeira entre o adaptador

CA e o plugue.

• Убедитесь, что вилка соединена с блоком питания.

Использование вилки без блока питания может

привести к поражению электрическим током или

пожару.

• Не прикасайтесь к металлическим частям при

подключении вилки. Во избежание поражения

электрическим током, короткого замыкания или

повреждения оборудования убедитесь, что между

блоком питания и ви

лкой нет пыли.

WARNUNG

ADVERTÊNCIAS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should

not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with

your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service

or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the

correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical

involved.

(weee_battery_eu_en_01)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb

Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben

werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”,

Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez,

03900, Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4º andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 São Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Venezuela

C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4

Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta

Caracas Venezuela

Tel: 58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/

ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Poland Office

ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: 02-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46 31 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 78 00

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik,

Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza

Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

SOUTH AFRICA

Global Music Instruments

World of Yamaha

19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton,

South Africa

Tel: +27-11-259-7700

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: 65-6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd.

3F, No.6, Section 2 Nan-Jing East Road, Taipei,

Taiwan R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI8

HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

ZN22380

Manual Development Department

Published 01/2015 PO##*.*-**A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN For PSR-E353 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Serial No. Purchase Date ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E353 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and PSR-E353 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 3 For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual About the Manuals In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do. Computer-related Operations Contains instructions about computer-related functions. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E353” (for example) to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC adaptor*1 • Music rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GMcompatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Style File Format (SFF) The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment knowhow into a single unified format. Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature gives you maximum expressive control over the level of the Voices. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 5 Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Contents About the Manuals................................................ 5 Included Accessories............................................ 5 Formats and functions .......................................... 5 Setting Up 10 Setting Up 12 Power Requirements .......................................... 12 Using the music rest ........................................... 13 Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or External Audio Equipment ............................. 13 Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack.. 13 Turning the Power On/Off................................... 13 Auto Power Off Function .................................... 14 Setting the Volume ............................................. 14 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 14 Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard . 14 15 Display Items ...................................................... 15 Basic Operations ................................................ 15 Reference Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 16 Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 16 Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 16 Using the Metronome ......................................... 16 Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 17 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 17 Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 18 Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 18 Adding Harmony or Arpeggio ............................. 19 Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) 21 Playing Styles 22 Using the Music Database.................................. 23 Registering a Style File....................................... 23 Style Variations—Sections ................................. 24 Changing the Tempo .......................................... 24 Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 25 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 26 Playing Songs 27 Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 27 Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 27 BGM Playback.................................................... 28 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 28 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 28 A-B Repeat ......................................................... 29 Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 29 6 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) ......................................30 Using the Song Lesson Feature Panel Controls and Terminals Display Items and Basic Operations Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 30 31 Downloading the Song Book............................... 31 Keys To Success ................................................31 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................33 Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting ..34 Phrase Repeat .................................................... 34 Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) 35 Hear and experience a sound of a single chord..35 Hear and experience basic chord progressions..35 Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song 36 Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function ....................................36 Recording Your Performance 37 Track Structure of a Song ...................................37 Quick Recording..................................................37 Recording to a Specified Track ...........................38 Clearing a User Song..........................................38 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 39 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ..........................................................39 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..........................................................39 The Functions 40 Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad 43 Connecting to a computer ...................................43 Connecting an iPhone/iPad.................................43 Backup and Initialization 43 Backup Parameters.............................................43 Initialization .........................................................43 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 44 Song Book Sample ........................................ 46 Voice List ........................................................ 56 Drum Kit List .................................................. 61 Song List......................................................... 64 Style List ......................................................... 65 Music Database List ...................................... 66 Effect Type List .............................................. 67 Specifications................................................. 69 Index................................................................ 70 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-E353 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) DMI-5 1/3 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 7 • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Battery • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - Use the specified battery type (page 69) only. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. DMI-5 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections Location 8 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. 2/3 • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Handling caution Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE Information To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others’ copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.  Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 43) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto an external device such as a computer (page 43). DMI-5  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 3/3 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel q w e r i t y o !0 u !1 Song List (page 64) !2 !3 Style List (page 65) !4 !5 Display (page 15) !6 Voice List (page 56) Music Database List (page 66) @9 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 @0 !7 @6 !8 @7 !9 @8 @1 10 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual @5 @2 @3 @4 C6 Panel Controls and Terminals q w e r t y [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..................... page 13 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ...................... page 13 [DEMO] button......................................page 28 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 40 [METRONOME] button......................... page 16 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 24 Rear Panel #0 In the Lesson mode u PART [L] button ..............................................page 33 [R] button ..............................................page 33 #1 #3 #2 #4 In the Recording mode u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 37 [REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 37 i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button...............page 31 o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 34 !0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button ...............................................................page 33 In the Song mode !1 [A-B REPEAT] button ...........................page 29 !2 [REW] button ........................................page 28 !3 [FF] button ............................................page 28 !4 [PAUSE] button.....................................page 28 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 [SUSTAIN] jack ..................................... page 13 [USB TO HOST] terminal*.................... page 43 [AUX IN] jack ........................................ page 30 [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack ..................... page 13 DC IN jack ............................................. page 12 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 5) on the website. When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. In the Style mode !1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .......................page 22 !2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.................page 24 !3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button....................page 24 !4 [SYNC START] button ..........................page 22 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 [START/STOP] button .................. pages 22, 27 [REC] button .........................................page 37 [SONG] button ......................................page 27 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 16 [STYLE] button .....................................page 22 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] ........... page 15 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ............... page 16 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button .......... page 18 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button........page 30 [REGIST MEMORY] button ..................page 39 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 23 [DUAL] button....................................... page 17 [SPLIT] button ...................................... page 17 [HARMONY] button .............................. page 19 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit .... page 16 Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.” The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up  Installing the batteries Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off. 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Using an AC adaptor 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlight display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 69) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN jack (power supply jack). 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION 3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. DC IN jack (page 11) 2 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that AC adaptor 3 AC outlet NOTE • After turning off the power, follow this procedure in reverse order to disconnect the AC adaptor. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Using Batteries This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/ Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickelmetal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-MH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. 12 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. • Change the setting of the instrument according to the kind of battery you are using (Battery Type; page 42). When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-recharged ones. NOTE • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Setting Up  Setting the battery type After installing new batteries and turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function number 046 (page 42). NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. NOTICE • Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly. Connecting a Footswitch to the [SUSTAIN] jack Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a Footswitch (FC5/FC4A; sold separately) plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. Connecting Headphones (sold separately) or External Audio Equipment • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. • The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 17) and style (automatic accompaniment; page 22). Turning the Power On/Off 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN.” 1/4” stereo phone plug A pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the [PHONES/ OUTPUT] jack to a computer, a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC adaptor from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn off the power for all components. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 13 Setting Up Auto Power Off Function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.  To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “AutoOff” (Function 045; page 42) appears, then use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes) Default value: 30 (minutes) Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second to call up “024 MasterEQ” (Function 024; page 41). “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears.  To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key. The Auto Power Off function also can be disabled by selecting Off in Function number 045 (page 42). MasterEQ 024 Hold for longer than a second. 1 Speaker 024 NOTE Current Master EQ type • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 43. NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. Setting the Volume When you start playing, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound. 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. Changing the Touch Response of the Keyboard You can specify the Touch Response (how the sound responds to your playing strength). This can be set via Function number 007 (page 40). CAUTION • Do not use this instrument at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. 14 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Display Items and Basic Operations Display Items Song/Voice/Style Lesson Indication These indicate the operating condition of the instrument. On/Off status This area indicates the Lesson related status is on. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. ... Touch Response (page 14) ... Ultra-Wide Stereo (page 18) ... Auto Accompaniment (page 22) ... Split (page 17) Keys To Success (page 31) Phrase Repeat (page 34) Chord Progression (page 36) Notation Indicates the Passing Status (page 32) of the Keys To Success lesson. Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function (page 26) is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. ... Arpeggio (page 19) ... Duo (page 21) NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. 001 GrandPno 003 Chord Song Track status Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto Accompaniment range (page 22) of the keyboard, or specified via Song playback. Measure or Function Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 40) is in use, this indicates the Function number. ... Dual (page 17) ... Harmony (page 19) Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or target Track of Song recording (page 29, 38). Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data 003 027 Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. Basic Operations Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values.  Number buttons  [-] and [+] buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harpsichord. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3], or simply press [3]. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of Voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice number 001 GrandPno Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. The Voice “001 Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Using the Metronome 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired Voice. Refer to the Voice List on page 56. 096 Flute The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. 2 Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Select 096 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. To change the tempo: Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Preset Voice Types 16 090 Tempo 001–196 Instrument Voices (including sound effects). 197–214 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 61. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. 215–234 Arpeggios are automatically reproduced by simply playing the keyboard (page 19). To set the Time Signature: 235–573 XGlite Voices (page 58) 000 One Touch Setting The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice when you select a Style or Song (excepting the Song inputted from the [AUX IN] jack). Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Current Tempo value Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up “TimeSigN” (Functions 036; page 42), then use the Number buttons. To set the Metronome Volume: This can be set via Function number 038 (page 42). Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. 001 GrandPno Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. Appears when Dual Voice is on 001 GrandPno Appears when Split Voice is on Two Voices will sound at the same time. 2 Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. 036 (C1) To select a different Dual Voice: Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 41), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 048 (C2) Split Voice 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Main Voice and Dual Voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” (Function 006; page 40) which can be changed from the default F#2 key. 2 Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. To select a different Split Voice: Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice” (Function 016; page 41), then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 17 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo) You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect. 1 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to turn it on. 001 GrandPno Appears when UltraWide Stereo is on. The sound will expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. 2 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again to turn it off. To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type: Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to call up “Wide” (Function 025; page 41), then use the Number buttons. 18 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Applying Effects to the Sound This instrument can apply various Effects as listed below to the instrument’s sound. Reverb Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 020 (page 41). You can also set the Reverb depth via Function number 021 (page 41). Chorus Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 022 (page 41). Panel Sustain By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function number 023 (page 41), you can add a fixed, automatic sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can also be applied as desired with the footswitch (sold separately; page 13). NOTE • Even if you turn on Panel Sustain, there are some Voices to which sustain is not applied. Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony or Arpeggio 2 You can add harmony or arpeggio notes to the Main Voice. By specifying the Harmony Type, you can apply harmony parts, such as duet or trio, or add tremolo or echo effects to the played sound of the Main Voice or the Dual Voice. Also, when the Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. For example, you could play the notes of a triad—the root, third, and fifth— and the Arpeggio function will automatically create a variety of interesting phrases. This feature can be used creatively in music production as well as performance. 1 Press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button to turn on the Harmony or Arpeggio function. 001 Hold down the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button for longer than a second so that “Harm/Arp” (Functions 028; page 41) appears on the display. After “Harm/Arp” is shown for a few seconds, the current type appears. Harm/Arp 028 Hold for longer than a second. 001 Duet 028 Current type 3 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired type. When you want to specify a Harmony Type, refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67; to specify an Arpeggio Type, refer to the Arpeggio Type list on page 67. GrandPno NOTE • When playing one of the Arpeggio Types 143 to 176, select one of the following dedicated Voices as the Main Voice. Appears when the Harmony is turned on. 143–173: Select a drum Voice. 174 (China): Select “StdKit1 + Chinese Perc” (Voice No.207). 175 (Indian): Select “Indian Kit 1” (Voice No.208) or “Indian Kit 2” (Voice No.209). 176 (Arabic): Select “Arabic Kit” (Voice No.210). or 106 Analogon Appears when the Arpeggio is turned on. 4 Press a note or notes on the keyboard to trigger the Harmony or Arpeggio. When a Harmony Type is selected, a harmony part (for example, duet or trio) or an effect (for example, tremolo or echo) can be added to the played sound of the Main Voice. Also, when an Arpeggio Type is selected, arpeggios (broken chords) are automatically played back when you simply play the appropriate notes on the keyboard. The particular arpeggio phrase differs depending on the number of pressed notes and the area of the keyboard. When the Harmony or the Arpeggio is turned on, the most suitable one will be selected for the current Main Voice. If you want to select a specific type, select it by the operation steps 2 and 3 below. NOTE • The Harmony effect can be added to only the Main Voice. • When selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234, the Arpeggio function will automatically be turned on. • When selecting a Harmony Type between 001 and 005, the harmony effect will only be added to your right-hand melody play if you turn on the Style (page 22) and press chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. 5 To turn the Harmony or Arpeggio off, press the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button again. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 19 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices How the effect is applied to the sound for the various Types Holding the Arpeggio Playback via the Footswitch (Hold) You can set the instrument so that Arpeggio playback continues even after the note has been released, by pressing the footswitch connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Harmony Type 001 to 005 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when Auto Accompaniment is on (page 22). 1 • Harmony Type 006 to 012 (Trill) Press a [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Pdl Func” (Function 031) item appears on the display. After “Pdl Func” is shown for a few seconds, the current setting is shown. Hold down two keys. Pdl Func • Harmony Type 013 to 019 (Tremolo) 031 Keep holding down the keys. 1 • Harmony Type 020 to 026 (Echo) Sustain 031 Play the keys. 2 • Arpeggio Type 027 to 176 If you want to restore the footswitch function to sustain, select “Sustain.” If you want to use both hold and sustain functions, select “Hold+Sus.” When Split is off: 2 Arpeggio function applies to the Main Voice and the Dual Voice. 3 NOTE • Arpeggio cannot be applied to the Split and Main/ Dual Voices simultaneously. • Selecting a Voice number between 225 and 234 as the Main Voice will turn on Arpeggio and Split automatically. To adjust the Harmony Volume: This can be adjusted via Function number 029 (page 41). To adjust the Arpeggio Velocity: This can be adjusted via Function number 030 (page 41). 20 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Arp Hold 031 When Split is on: Arpeggio function applies only to the split Voice. Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select “Arp Hold.” Try playing the keyboard with Arpeggio playback using the footswitch. Press the notes to trigger the Arpeggio, then press the footswitch. Even if you release the notes, Arpeggio playback will continue. To stop Arpeggio playback, release the footswitch. Playing the keyboard with two persons (Duo mode) When the Duo mode is activated on this instrument, two different players can play the instrument simultaneously, with the same sound, over the same octave range—one person on the left and the other on the right. This is useful for learning applications, in which one person (a teacher, for example) plays a model performance and the other person watches and practices while sitting at the first person’s side. 1 To start this instrument in the Duo mode, simultaneously hold down the [L] button and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. How sounds are output in the Duo mode Notes played in the left Voice section sound from the left side speaker while notes played in the right Voice section sound from the right side speaker, in the initial Duo mode setting. This output setting can be changed from the “VoiceOut” setting (Function 027; page 41). “DuoMode” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the F#3 key becomes the Split Point and the keyboard is divided into two sections: one for the left Voice and one for the right Voice. NOTE • In the Duo mode, the pan, volume and tonal characteristics of the strereo sound may differ from those in the normal mode, due to the setting of VoiceOut = “Separate” (page 41). Particularly with Drum Kits, the difference may be more obvious, since each key of a Drum Kit features a different stereo pan position. Using sustain in the Duo mode on Equivalent to C3 Sustain can be applied to the left and right Voice sections in Duo mode just as it normally is by using one of the following methods in the Duo mode like the usual mode. DuoMode Split Point: 066 (F#3) Equivalent to C3 • Press the foot switch (page 13) connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. • Set “Sustain” (Function 023; page 41) to on. NOTE Left Voice • Sustain cannot be applied independently to the left Voice section and the right Voice section. Right Voice NOTE • While Panel Sustain is on, the setting of hold is maintained even when the power is turned off. • The right Voice section and the left Voice section of the keyboard are both set to the same Voice (Main Voice). • In the Duo mode, the Split Point cannot be changed from F# 3. 2 Style Playback in the Duo mode Although full Style features (accompaniment) cannot be used in the Duo mode, the rhythm part of a Style can be played back while playing the left/right Voices normally. One person should play the left Voice section of the keyboard while the other plays the right Voice section. Recording in the Duo mode Selecting a Voice Select a Voice by executing Steps 1 and 2 in “Selecting a Main Voice” on page 16. NOTE • When a Dual Voice is selected from Voice numbers 162 to 188, the left Voice section sounds only the Main Voice. • Certain functions such as Lesson, Harmony/Arpeggio and Dual cannot be used in the Duo mode. The right Voice section and the left Voice section are recorded on the same track. 3 To exit from the Duo mode, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn off the power, and turn the power back on again normally. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Style. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the Style List (page 65). 025 LoveSong Style Number Flashes when sync start is on. 002 8BtModrn 4 Style Name Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. For information about chords, refer to “Chord Types for Style Playback” (page 25) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 26). This icon appears when the [STYLE] button is pressed. 2 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. Split Point 025 LoveSong This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (054: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 24. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) To play back the rhythm part only 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) Auto Accompaniment range The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can be changed from the default of F#2 via Function number 006 (page 40). If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a melody performance using the entire keyboard range. NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (150–158) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. When playing these Styles, make sure to carry out Steps 2–4 on this page. Adjusting the Style Volume To adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This can be set via Function number 001 (page 40). 22 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Using the Music Database If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. 001 2 In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a computer) as Style number 159 which will be used in the same way as the Preset Styles. 1 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Music Database. Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a computer to this instrument by using Musicsoft Downloader. For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5) on the website. You can transfer two or more Styles to this instrument although only a single Style can be registered to Style number 159. AlvFever This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. The category name of Music Database List is provided on the front panel, or in the Music Database List (page 66). 3 Registering a Style File 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “StyleReg” (Function 008; page 40) appears. StyleReg Play the keyboard as described in Steps 4–5 on page 22. 008 After about two seconds, a registerable Style file name will appear in the display. 3 If necessary, select the desired Style by using the [+] or [-] button. 4 Press the [0] button. 5 Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles Style Variations—Sections 7 Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. These instructions cover a typical example for using the Sections. After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. FILL A≥B 8 1–3 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Same as Steps 1–3 in page 22. 4 MAIN A Current Section 5 Changing the Tempo Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 25. Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 24 The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A 6 ENDING Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Song. Using the Tap function While a Song or Style is playing back, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song or Style. Playing Styles Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary Dict. 001 The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 2-2. Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. Dict. Chord name (root and type) This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. • The range to the right of “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Keyboard playing range Chord Type range As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. 26 Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. Root range Far right of the keyboard 2 Dict. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(# 11), b 5, M7b 5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b 5, 7b 5, sus2 3 Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE .” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. Hear and experience the sound of chords and easy chord progressions while playing the keyboard according to the LCD display indications. Learn how to play chords with Songs featuring simple, fundamental chord progressions. Songs (User Songs) you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 5). Listening to a Demo Song Song number Press the [DEMO] button to play the Demo Songs in sequence. 004 Elise 1 Song name When Song numbers 001 to 003 are played back in sequence and the last Song (003) is finished, playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button. Appears after the [Song] button is pressed. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected Song. To change the tempo: Selecting and Playing Back a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button, then use the Number buttons to select the desired Song. Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 24. Adjusting the Song Volume To adjust the volume balance between Song playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This can be set via Function number 002 (page 40). Refer to the Song List (page 64). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Songs BGM Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. 1 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” (Function 042; page 42) is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Use the [+] or [-] button to select a playback group. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (155–159) Download All songs transferred from a computer (160–) NOTE Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO] button. • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. 3 Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. Random Song Playback When the Demo Group (above) is set to something other than “Demo,” the playback order via the [DEMO] button can be changed between numerical order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Function 043; page 42) is called up, then select “Normal” or “Random.” Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other desired Voice. 1 2 3 Select a Song. Select the desired Voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces the Song’s original melody Voice. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 28 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs A-B Repeat Turning Each Part On/Off You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A B As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), Songs other than Song numbers 115 to 154 consist of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individually by pressing the corresponding button, L or R. Repeat playback of this section 1 Start playback of the Song (page 27). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. 020 FrereJac 010 Lit: Track contains data 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off during playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the keyboard. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the Parts. NOTE • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player, with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you play the keyboard along with playback of your music player. 1 Turn off the power for both the external audio device and this instrument. 2 Connect the audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at one side for connecting to this instrument and the plug matching the output jack of the external audio device at the other side. Lowering the volume of a melody part (Melody Suppressor function) When the sound of an external audio device is output through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the melody part of stereo playback. You can use the function to cancel the melody part then practice it via the keyboard. 1 Play back the connected external audio device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. Stereo-mini plug on Audio device (Portable audio player, etc.) MelodySP Appears when Melody Suppressor is on NOTE 3 Turn on the external audio device, then this instrument. 4 Play back the connected external audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 5 Adjust the volume balance between the external audio device and this instrument. • If an external audio device is not properly connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, the Melody Suppressor function cannot be turned on or shown in the display, even if you press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button. When the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled (or lowered) as expected 1 If possible, adjust the playback level of the external audio device first, to achieve optimum balance. NOTE Hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “SupprPan” (Function 026; page 41) while the Melody Suppressor function is turned on. • You can adjust the level of the input from the external audio device by calling up “AuxInVol” via Function number 003 (page 40) and using the [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons. 6 Play the keyboard along with the sound of the audio device. 7 After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. CAUTION L63 – C – R63 (Left – Center – Right) C 026 Hold for longer than a second. 2 • Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. 30 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Adjust the pan position of the sound to be cancelled (lowered) by using the [+], [-] buttons. NOTE • Depending on the particular music content, the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. NOTICE • After connecting, first turn on the power to the external audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. SupprPan 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. Using the Song Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R” or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If you have already passed several Steps, the next Step number appears on the display. Downloading the Song Book To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Appears when Keys to Success is on Keys To Success Step01 In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the entire Song. 1 Prepare the Song Book. Download the Song Book from the above website, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the end of this manual. The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are pre-programmed) will differ depending on the Song. For details, refer to the Song Book. Current Step number Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, playback of the current Step starts. NOTE • All preset Songs 004 to 102 other than 001–003 and 103– 154 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs. 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select a Song for your lesson. Step01 Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corresponding page of the Song Book. 001 NOTE 004 3 • For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may be slower than original. Elise 1 Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to engage this lesson. 5 Practice the phrase in the current Step. Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the notes shown on the display, press the notes. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 31 Using the Song Lesson Feature 6 Confirm the evaluation in the current Step. When the current Step reaches the end, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 Confirming the Passing Status You can confirm the passing status of each Song simply by selecting a Song and each Step. When Step is selected Step01 Excellen 001 Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. ✩ : Passed No information: Not yet passed A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did not pass this Step and you should try the same Step again, which begins automatically. A score of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. 7 passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on. In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all the way through the Song. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE • Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using the [+]/[-] buttons. 8 ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. Clearing the Passing Status You can clear existing passing status entries for the entire Song or a specific Step of the Song. To clear the passing status entries of all Steps: Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds, with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. To clear the passing status entry for a specific Step: Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success, select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. NOTE • This operation cannot be executed during playback. 32 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Using the Song Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting 3 Lesson 1—Listening In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. Pressing this button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTENING  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. Lesson 2—Timing In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound. NOTE • During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. • The Main Voice changes to “000” (One Touch Setting; page 16) during the Lesson. 4 NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF via the Function number 041 (page 42). 1 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels. Excellent! ~~~~~~~~ Very Good! ~~~~~~ Good ~~~~ OK ~~ Press the [SONG] button then select a Song for your lesson. NOTE • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 43), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. 2 After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Press either or both the [R] and [L] buttons to select the part you want to practice. Left-hand lesson NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the selected Voice. NOTE Right-hand lesson Left • The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during lessons. Right 5 Both-hands lesson BothHand Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • Songs 115 to 154 are not compatible with the Listening, Timing and Waiting Lessons. NOTE • In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the current Song does not contain a left-hand part. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Song Lesson Feature Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 31) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 33). 1 Enable the Keys to Success lesson. 2 Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select the desired lesson. Practicing only a single Phrase During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to practice. The corresponding Phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off the L or R part (page 29), then practice the phrase which is turned off repeatedly until you are satisfied. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 31. The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is not available. 3 To return to only the Keys to Success mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select “off.” 4 To exit from the Lesson mode, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. P03 REPEAT Phrase number Even during repeat playback, you can select any other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again. Using Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing or Waiting With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or three times to start and use Lesson playback with Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode. NOTE • In this status, the evaluation function is not available. Practicing two or more Phrases Phrase Repeat You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-programmed in the Preset Songs (excepting the Song numbers 001–003, 103–154). You can confirm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 5). Phrase mark By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again. NOTE • You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons. • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Repeat playback of this section 34 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Hearing and Experiencing the Sound of the Chords (Chord Study) You can hear and experience the sound of the chords used in a typical performance by playing back Song numbers 103 to 114 (in the “Chord Study” category). Song numbers 103 to 109 are very simple songs consisting of a single chord (C, Dm, Em, F, G, Am, Bm; respectively) played in various positions, letting you listen to and master the chords one by one. On the other hand, Song numbers 110 to 114 consist of several chords strung together in a pattern, for experiencing and understanding basic chord progressions. Hear and experience the sound of simple chords and progressions by playing back these Songs, and play the keyboard while following along with the music notation and key/chord indications shown in the display. Hear and experience a sound of a single chord 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 103 to 109 in the “CHORD STUDY” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. 103 ChdStd01 003 Hear and experience basic chord progressions 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 110 to 114 by pressing the [+]/[-] buttons. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 3 Play the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. Listen to the basic chord progression, and play along with the Song repeatedly until you can smoothly perform and play along with the chord changes. NOTE • You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. NOTICE • When playing the keyboard while playing back a Song, you should turn off any parts you don’t intend to have played back (page 29), to avoid exceeding the maximum number of simultaneous notes. NOTE • You can use the waiting function (page 33) by pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Chords Along With Chord Progressions of a Song Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category are constructed from typical chord progressions. You can listen to and get a feel for the chord progressions by playing back the Song and playing the keyboard while looking at the notes shown on the display. The number of keys that are indicated for you to play progress in sequence— from a single root note, to two notes, then three and four—getting you to gradually and naturally memorize the chords. Also, you can change the key of the Song, allowing you to practice the progressions in all keys for full mastery of the chords. 1 Select a Song from Song numbers 115 to 154 in the “Chord Progression” category by executing Step 1 in “Selecting and Playing Back a Song” on page 27. 2 Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. To change the key of a Song: When Chord Progression is on, press one of the keys in the top octave (C5–B5; indicated to the right of “ROOT” on the panel, just above the keys) to change the tonic pitch of the Song. After “CHORD PROGRESSION” scrolls across the display, the tonic pitch of the selected Song and the number of the keys to be pressed are shown. Root range Db Eb F# Ab Bb The tonic pitch of the selected Song: C Far right of the keyboard C D E F G A B CPg Appears when Chord Progression is on. C 1Note The number of the keys to press: 1 For example, if you press the key D5 in the Song of C major, the key changes to D major. NOTE • The key of a Song cannot be changed during playback. NOTE • The initial key setting is C major or A minor. 3 Press the [+]/[-] buttons to select the number of the keys to be played. Each time the [+] button is pressed, the number of the keys to press is increased from just one root note (1Note) to two notes (2Notes), three notes (3Notes) and four notes (All). CPg C 2Notes NOTE • The number of the keys to press can also be set by using the number buttons [1]–[4]. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the selected Song. 5 Play the keyboard looking at the notes shown on the display. CPg C 1Note 001 NOTE • When you play the keyboard within the range of C5–B5, the notes will not sound. 6 36 Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again to turn the Chord Progression function off. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual The number of the keys to be played Only one root note (1Note) Press only the root note of the chord. Two notes (2Notes) Press the 3rd interval of a chord along with the root note, and understand the difference between major chords and minor chords. Three notes (3Notes) Press the 5th interval of a chord along with the root note and the 3rd. Four notes (All) Press all the notes that make up the chord. Very often, chords are played with just three notes; however, another interval (such as a 7th) is sometimes added. Keep in mind that depending on the chord, there may be no 4th note. Play the chords in combination with “Waiting” of the Lesson function You can practice the playing the chords in combination with “Waiting” (page 33) of the Lesson function by simply pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once. NOTE • Even if you play notes in octaves outside of the notes shown on the display (excluding the range of C5–B5, which are used to change the key of a Song), as well as different inversions of the chords, the playback will progress. Recording Your Performance You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 155–159). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. Track Structure of a Song User Song Number You can record your performance to the following two tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously. rEC User 1 001 Track 1: Your melody performance is recorded to this track. Flashes Track 2: Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord changes and Section changes), is recorded to this track. To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC] button again to stop flashing on the display. NOTICE • If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1 (Song Number 155)” will automatically be selected. In this case, since you will record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” we recommend that you save your important data to a computer (see page 43). Recording Data Capacity: NOTE A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. Quick Recording • ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you can select another Style in this status by using the [STYLE] and Number buttons. 3 The operation is convenient for recording a new Song without having to specify a track. 1 Press the [REC] button to enable the Record mode. If ACMP is turned on, you can independently record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing the Section (page 24). Split Point ... default setting: 054 (F#2) Make the desired settings such as Voice and Style settings. 36 If you want to record only the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback as well as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 Play the keyboard to start recording. 48 60 72 Auto Accompaniment range 4 On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then waiting until playback ends. NOTICE • After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal memory and result in a loss of data. 5 To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Performance Recording to a Specified Track 1 Make the desired settings, such as those of Voice or Style. If you want to record the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 22). If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 22). 2 Clearing a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button then select the desired User Song by using the Number buttons. 2 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to engage the Record mode. A confirmation message appears. If you want to record Style playback, make sure to select the Track 2. If you want to record melody performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as desired. The illustration below is the example when selecting Track 2. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 3 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message appears again. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 1 YES Sure? 001 To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for example and Track 1 contains already recorded data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will determine whether you listen to a previously recorded Track or not while recording a new Track. 4 Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 37) in “Quick Recording.” Limitations while Recording • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons are not available, or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded: ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony/Arpeggio Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. 38 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A “Writing!” message appears while the track is being cleared. Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9. Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice and Style. 2 Press and hold down the [REGIST MEMORY] button for longer than a second. Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button. “LoadNo.?” appears on the display. LoadNo.? “MemNo.?” appears on the display. MemNo.? 2 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display. Hold for longer than a second. 3 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, an “Overwr?” message appears in the display. To overwrite, press the [+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO]. 01 REGIST 1 The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume, Tempo, Main A/B Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions Effect settings: Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type Harmony/Arpeggio settings: Harmony/Arpeggio on/ off and all settings of the related Functions Other settings: Panel Sustain on/off, Transpose, Voice output * When a Song is selected, the Style settings cannot be recorded or called up. Also, in the Duo mode, only Style settings can be recorded or called up. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 39 The Functions The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until the desired item appears. 2 Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. To decrease the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [-] button briefly. To increase the Function number by one, simultaneously hold down the [FUNCTION] button and press the [+] button briefly. Simply pressing only the [+] or [-] button does not change the Function number. Current value Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off Function name Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On StyleVol 100 NOTE 001 • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE] or [STYLE]. Function number After a few seconds, the Function name may be replaced with the setting value depending on the selected Function. NOTE • The Function number does not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value appears instead. Function List Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 27) 100 Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 30) Determines the volume of the Style. (page 22) AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. 006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 007 Touch Response TouchRes 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Fixed) 2 (Medium) Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Fixed) is selected, Touch Response is off and the volume level does not change at all regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard. Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 23). 003 Overall 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. Style file 008 40 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Main Voice (page 16) 009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Adjusts the volume of keyboard performance when performing along with a Song or a Style. 010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects a Dual Voice. Dual Voice (page 17) 012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–573 * 013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice (page 17) 016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–573 * Selects a Split Voice. 017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 68) Effects 020 Reverb Type Reverb 1–3 (Hall 1–3) 4–5 (Room 1–2) 6–7 (Stage 1–2) 8–9 (Plate 1–2) 10 (Off) 021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (6). (page 68) 022 Chorus Type Chorus 1 (Chorus1) 2 (Chorus2) 3 (Chorus3) 4 (Flanger1) 5 (Flanger2) 6 (off) 023 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker) 2 (Headphone) 3 (Boost) 4 (Piano) 5 (Bright) 6 (Mild) 025 Wide Type Wide 1 (Wide1) 2 (Wide2) 3 (Wide3) 026 Suppressor Pan SupprPan L63 – C – R63 027 Voice Output VoiceOut 1 (Normal) 2 (Separate) OFF 1 (Speaker) 2 (Wide2) C 2 (Separate) Determines whether the Panel Sustain function is on or off. Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. (page 14) Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 18) Adjusts the position of the playback sound of the external audio device to be canceled or lowered (page 30). When a Split Voice (page 17) is turned on or Duo mode (page 21) is on, this function is effective. If “Normal” is selected, the performance sounds of the left Voice and the right Voice will sound from both the left and right speakers. If “Separate” is selected, the performance sound of the left Voice will sound from the left speaker, and the performance sound of the right Voice will sound from the right speaker. Harmony (page 19) 028 Harmony/Arpeggio Type Harm/Arp 001–026 (Harmony) 027–176 (Arpeggio) * Determines whether the Harmony type or Arpeggio type is selected. 029 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the Harmony types 1–5 is selected. Arpeggio (page 19) 030 Arpeggio Velocity Arp Velo 1 (Original) 2 (Thru) ** If “Thru” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at a volume matching the strength at which you play the keyboard. If “Original” is selected, arpeggios will be played back at their original volume regardless of your playing strength. 031 Pedal Function Pdl Func 1 (Sustain) 2 (Arp Hold) 3 (Hold+Sus) * Refer to the page 20. PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF Computer (page 42) 032 PC mode Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 42). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 41 The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions MIDI 033 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 034 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 035 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/ YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. Metronome (page 16) 036 Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. 037 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. 038 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson (page 31) 039 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 040 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 041 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are playing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed you are playing at. Demo (page 27) 042 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) 2 (Preset) 3 (User) 4 (Download) 1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group. 043 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode. 044 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (minutes) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery Auto Power Off (page 14) 045 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff Battery (page 13) 046 Battery Type Battery * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song, Style or Arpeggio. PC Mode (FUNCTION 032) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes * An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use. ** Cannot be set independently. NOTE • MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs. 42 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Using with a Computer or iPhone/iPad Connecting to a computer This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/ Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer connected via a USB cable. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computerrelated Operations” (page 5) on the website. USB terminal Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 • Style: (.sty) • Backup File: PSR-E353.BUP * * Backup parameters (as described below) other than “Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. NOTE USB terminal • This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256 Song files. Connecting an iPhone/iPad computer instrument USB cable NOTE • If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to register it to this instrument for Style playback. For details, refer to the “Registering a Style File” on page 23. By connecting your iPhone/iPad to the instrument, you can take advantage of various functions. To make connections, prepare the i-UX1 (sold separately), then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” (page 5) on the website. Backup and Initialization Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Backup parameters • • • • • User Songs (page 37) Style Number 159 (page 23) Registration Memory (page 39) Passing status of Song and Step (page 32) FUNCTION Settings: (page 40) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Response, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Battery Type In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data registered to Style numbers 159 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. NOTICE Initialization You can initialize your original data via the following two methods. • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 5). PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 43 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with the application on iPhone/iPad/iPod touch. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad/iPod touch in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES/OUTPUT] jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 033.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 26), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06– 26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 034). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. • Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. • The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the Duo mode is on. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 40 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 40 Function 006). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. • • • • The volume is too soft. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The sound quality is poor. ones, or use the included AC adaptor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. 44 Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 14). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (Function 045; page 42). When the instrument is turned on, power is turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. This is normal. If an AC adaptor other than the one specified is used, power may be turned off suddenly and unexpectedly. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Memo PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 45 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 46 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note Whole note rest Dotted half note Dotted half note rest Half note Half note rest Dotted quarter note Dotted quarter note rest Quarter note Time signature Notes and Rests Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note Eighth note rest Sixteenth note Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 47 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency. From here... 48 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 ...to here Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 49 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 50 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 51 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst phrase. 52 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 53 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot. Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 54 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!” Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands. Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the ﬁnishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 55 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 56 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 Strings 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 117 67 Sweet! Tenor Sax 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass 0 113 63 80s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funky Brass 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead Voice List Voice No. 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Stardust 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 112 106 Banjo 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 16 Dulcimer 1 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 98 106 Oud 0 96 106 Rabab 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 0 114 105 Tanpura 0 96 112 Pungi 0 117 74 Bansuri 0 0 105 Sitar 1 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 0 112 Shehnai 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 116 117 Tabla 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 118 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 113 108 Gu Zheng 0 40 47 Yang Qin 0 120 111 Morin Khuur 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto 0 96 108 Taisho-kin DUAL* – – – Octave Piano – – – Piano & Strings – – – Piano Pad – – – Octave Harpsichord – – – Tiny Electric Piano – – – Electric Piano Pad – – – Full Organ – – – Octave Jazz Guitar – – – Octave Strings – – – Orchestra Section – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings Voice No. 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) – – – Strings Session – – – Brass Tutti – – – Orchestra Tutti – – – Octave French Horns – – – Octave Harp – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani – – – Octave Choir – – – Jazz Brass Section – – – Jazz Section – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble – – – Ballroom Brass – – – Flute & Clarinet – – – Trumpet & Trombone – – – Fat Synth Brass – – – Octave Lead – – – Super 5th Lead SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit ARPEGGIO** – – – Concerto – – – Latin Rock – – – Brass Section – – – Piano Ballad – – – Synth Sequence – – – Guitarist – – – Pickin' – – – Spanish – – – Funky Clavi – – – Harpeggio – – – Finger Bass Left – – – Combo Jazz Left – – – Paul's Bass Left – – – Trance Bass Left – – – Acid Bass Left – – – Piano Ballad Left – – – Salsa Piano Left – – – Piano Arpeggio Left – – – Guitar Arpeggio Left – – – Strum Left * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. ** Selecting a Voice number between 215 and 234 will turn on Arpeggio. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 57 Voice List XGlite Voice List Voice No. 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 58 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 1 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 1 0 64 11 Music Box 2 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 1 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 Organ 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 1 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary Organ 0 66 19 Fast Rotary Organ 0 0 20 Church Organ 1 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 23 Harmonica 1 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 1 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 1 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 1 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 1 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 1 0 18 34 Finger Bass Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 1 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp Voice List Voice No. 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 1 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 1 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 1 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 1 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 1 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 1 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square Voice No. 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 1 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 59 Voice List Voice No. 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 60 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 103 Echoes 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 1 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 1 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 572 573 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “197: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 197 127/000/001 198 127/000/002 199 127/000/009 200 127/000/017 201 127/000/025 202 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare H Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Rock H Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 Snare Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Rock Bass Drum Gate Bass Drum Analog L Bass Drum Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 Snare Room L Snare Rock L Snare Rock L Snare H Hard 2 Snare Room H Room Tom 1 Snare Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 Snare Rock H Electronic Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 Electronic Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 Electronic Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 Electronic Tom 4 Electronic Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 Electronic Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 61 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 62 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 203 127/000/113 204 127/000/033 205 127/000/041 206 127/000/049 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit 207 126/000/128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Analog Snare Snappy Snare Jazz H Light Analog Bass Drum Dance 1 Analog Snare Open Rim Analog Bass Drum Dance 2 Analog Bass Drum Dance 3 Bass Drum Jazz Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Q Snare Jazz L Analog Snare + Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog Hi-Hat Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog Hi-Hat Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Snare Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Slap L Bass Drum L Bass Drum Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Brush Slap Marching Snare M Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Snare H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cymbal L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cymbal Short L Analog Cowbell Hand Cymbal H Hand Cymbal Short H Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open 208 126/000/040 Indian Kit 1 Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list. 209 126/000/115 210 126/000/037 211 126/000/041 212 126/000/001 213 126/000/002 214 126/000/113 Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit Indian Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Indian Bhangra Scat 3 indian Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Drum Loop Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 63 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Song No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song No. 103–114 115–154 Song Name Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) Special Appendix Chord Study ChdStd01–ChdStd12 Chord Progression Maj1234–min1736 • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ 64 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Style List Style No. Style Name 8BEAT Style No. Style Name Style No. Style Name 56 BigBandBallad 113 Dandiya 1 BritPopRock 57 AcousticJazz 114 Qawwali 2 8BeatModern 58 AcidJazz 115 FolkHills 3 Cool8Beat 59 JazzClub 116 ModernDangdut 4 StadiumRock 60 Swing1 117 Keroncong 5 70sRock 61 Swing2 118 XiQingLuoGu 6 HardRock1 62 Five/Four 119 YiZuMinGe 7 60sGuitarPop 63 Dixieland 120 JingJuJieZou 8 8BeatAdria 64 Ragtime 9 60s8Beat 121 VienneseWaltz 10 8Beat 65 BluesRock 122 EnglishWaltz 11 OffBeat 66 Soul 123 Slowfox 12 Folkrock 67 DetroitPop 124 Foxtrot 13 60sRock 68 60sRock&Roll 125 Quickstep 14 HardRock2 69 6/8Soul 126 Tango 15 RockShuffle 70 CrocoTwist 127 Pasodoble 16 8BeatRock 71 Rock&Roll 128 Samba 16BEAT 72 ComboBoogie 129 ChaChaCha 73 6/8Blues 130 Rumba 17 16Beat R&B BALLROOM 131 Jive 18 PopShuffle 19 GuitarPop 74 CountryPop 20 16BeatUptempo 75 CountrySwing 132 USMarch 21 KoolShuffle 76 Country2/4 133 6/8March 22 HipHopLight 77 Bluegrass 134 GermanMarch LATIN 135 PolkaPop COUNTRY BALLAD TRADITIONAL 23 70sGlamPiano 78 BrazilianSamba 136 OberPolka 24 PianoBallad 79 BossaNova 137 Tarantella 25 LoveSong 80 Forro 138 Showtune 26 6/8ModernEP 81 Sertanejo1 139 ChristmasSwing 27 6/8SlowRock 82 Sertanejo2 140 ChristmasWaltz 28 OrganBallad 83 Baião 29 PopBallad 84 Joropo 141 SwingWaltz 30 16BeatBallad 85 Parranda 142 JazzWaltz DANCE 86 Reggaeton 143 ValsMexicano ClubBeat 87 Tijuana 144 CountryWaltz 32 Electronica 88 PasoDuranguense 145 OberkrainerWalzer 33 FunkyHouse 89 CumbiaGrupera 146 Musette 34 RetroClub 90 BaladaBanda 35 USHipHop 91 MexicanMambo 147 Learning2/4 36 MellowHipHop 92 Mambo 148 Learning4/4 37 Chillout 93 Salsa 149 Learning6/8 38 EuroTrance 94 Beguine 39 Ibiza 95 Reggae 150 Stride 40 SwingHouse 151 PianoSwing 41 Clubdance 96 ScottishReel 152 PianoBoogie 42 ClubLatin 97 4/4Standart 153 Arpeggio 43 Garage1 98 Rumba2/4 154 Habanera 44 Garage2 99 Saeidy 155 SlowRock 45 TechnoParty 100 WehdaSaghira 156 8BeatPianoBallad 46 UKPop 101 IranianElec 157 6/8PianoMarch 47 HipHopGroove 102 Emarati 158 PianoWaltz 48 HipShuffle 103 AfricanGospelReggae 49 HipHopPop 104 HighLife DISCO 105 IndianPop 50 ModernDisco 106 Bhangra 51 70sDisco 107 Bhajan 52 LatinDisco 108 BollyMix 53 SaturdayNight 109 Tamil 54 DiscoHands 110 Kerala SWING&JAZZ 111 GoanPop BigBandFast 112 Rajasthan 31 55 WORLD WALTZ CHILDREN PIANIST PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 65 Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP MDB No. MDB Name 92 CielPari GrndClok 1 AlvFever 47 ChooChoo 93 2 DayPdise 48 HighMoon 94 JinglBel 3 GoMyWay 49 InMood 95 MickMrch 4 HowDeep! 50 MistyBld 96 Showbiz 5 HurryLuv 51 MoonLit 97 StarMrch 6 Imagine 52 New York 98 WashPost 7 JustCall 53 SaintMch 99 SilentNt 8 SultanSw 54 ShearJz 100 YankDood 9 WhitePle 55 TstHoney 10 YesterBd 56 ROCK USPatrol EASY LISTENING 11 JumpRock 57 Close2U 12 PickUpPc 58 Entrtain 13 RdRiverR 59 LuvStory 14 SatsfyRk 60 MyPrince 15 Sheriff 61 PupetStr 16 SmokeWtr 62 Raindrop 17 TwistAgn 63 R'ticGtr 18 VenusPop 64 SingRain DANCE 65 SmallWld 19 2 of Us 66 SpkSoft 20 B Leave 67 StrangeN 21 Back St 68 TimeGoes 22 Crockett 69 WhteXmas 23 FunkyTwn 70 WishStar 24 KillSoft 71 WondrWld 25 Nine PM 26 SingBack 72 BambaLa 27 StrandD 73 BeHappy! BALLAD 66 MDB Name SWING & JAZZ LATIN 74 CopaLola 75 DayNight Ipanema 28 AdelineB 29 CatMemry 76 30 ElvGhett 77 MuchoBgn 31 Feeling 78 Sunshine 32 Mn Rivr 79 TicoSmb 33 OnMyMnd 80 WaveBosa 34 OverRbow 35 ReleseMe 81 BoxerGtr 36 SavingLv 82 CntryRds 37 SmokyEye 83 Jambala 38 WhisprBd 84 TopWorld R&B 85 YlwRose BrazilBr COUNTRY BALLROOM 39 AmazingG 40 BoogiePf 86 41 Clock Rk 87 CheryApl 42 CU later 88 DanubeWv 43 HappyDay 89 TangoAc 44 RisingSn 90 45 ShookUp 46 TeddyBer PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Tea4Two TRADITIONAL 91 CampRace Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 001 Harmony Type Description Duet 002 Trio 003 Block 004 Country 005 Octave 006 Trill 1/4 note 007 Trill 1/6 note 008 Trill 1/8 note 009 Trill 1/12 note 010 Trill 1/16 note 011 Trill 1/24 note 012 Trill 1/32 note 013 Tremolo 1/4 note 014 Tremolo 1/6 note 015 Tremolo 1/8 note 016 Tremolo 1/12 note 017 Tremolo 1/16 note 018 Tremolo 1/24 note 019 Tremolo 1/32 note 020 Echo 1/4 note 021 Echo 1/6 note 022 Echo 1/8 note 023 Echo 1/12 note 024 Echo 1/16 note 025 Echo 1/24 note 026 Echo 1/32 note If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Arpeggio Type List Arpeggio No. 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 Arpeggio Name UpOct DownOct UpDwnOct SynArp1 SynArp2 SynArp3 SynArp4 SyncEcho PulsLine StepLine Random Down&Up Arpeggio No. 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Arpeggio Name SuperArp AcidLine TekEcho VelGruv Planet Trance1 Trance2 Trance3 ChordAlt SynChrd1 SynChrd2 Syncopa Arpeggio No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 Arpeggio Name Hybrid1 Hybrid2 Hybrid3 Hybrid4 Hybrid5 PfArp1 PfArp2 PfArp3 PfArp4 PfClub1 PfClub2 PfBallad PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 67 Effect Type List Arpeggio No. 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 Arpeggio Name PfChd8th EPArp PfShufle PfRock Clavi1 Clavi2 RocknPf 70RockPf SlowflPf SoulPf ChordUp ChdDance LatinRck Salsa1 Salsa2 Reggae1 Reggae2 Reggae3 6/8R&B Gospel BalladEP Strum1 Strum2 Strum3 Strum4 Pickin1 Pickin2 Funky GtrChrd1 GtrChrd2 GtrChrd3 GtrArp FngrPck1 FngrPck2 CleanGtr Slowfl Samba1 Samba2 Spanish1 Spanish2 Harp1 Harp2 FngrBas1 Arpeggio No. 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 Arpeggio Name FngrBas2 FngrBas3 CoolFunk SlapBass AcidBas1 AcidBas2 FunkyBas CmbJazB1 CmbJazB2 CmbJazB3 NewR&BBs HipHopBs SmoothBs DreamBas TranceBs LatinBas Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 Strings4 StrngDwn StrngUp OrcheStr Jupiter Pizz1 Pizz2 BrasSec1 BrasSec2 BrasSec3 FunkBras SoulReed DiscoLd SmoothPd PercArp Ethnic Cresendo DiscoCP Perc1 Perc2 R&B Funk1 Funk2 Funk3 Arpeggio No. 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 Chorus Types No. 01–03 04–05 06 68 Chorus Type Description Chorus 1–3 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual Arpeggio Name Soul ClscHip Smooth NewGospl CmbJazz1 CmbJazz2 Bebop JazzHop FolkRock Unpluggd HipHop Trance Dream 2 Step ClubHs1 ClubHs2 EuroTek House Ibiza1 Ibiza2 Ibiza3 Garage Samba African Latin China Indian Arabic Specifications Size/Weight Keyboard Display Voices Effects Accompaniment Styles Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Type Backlight Language Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Reverb Chorus Ultra-Wide Stereo Types Master EQ Harmony Arpeggio Melody Suppressor (for AUX IN) Dual Functions Split Panel Sustain Number of Preset Styles Fingering Preset Style Control External Styles Other Features Preset Recording/Playback (MIDI data only; audio not supported.) Recording Compatible Data Format Music Database One Touch Setting Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Playback Recording Lesson/Guide Registration Function Overall Miscellaneous Memory Memory/ Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Connectivity Number of Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Duo Portable Grand Button Internal Memory USB TO HOST DC IN Headphones/Output Sustain Pedal AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Amplifiers Speakers Adaptor Power Supply Power Supply Batteries Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories Accessories Optional Accessories 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”) 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.) 61 Yes LCD display Yes English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 196 panel Voices + 18 Drum/SFX kits + 20 Arpeggio + 339 XGlite Voices GM/XGlite 9 types 5 types 3 types 6 types 26 types 150 types Yes Yes Yes Yes 158 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes 100 Yes 154 (including Chord Study: 12, Chord Progression: 40) 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes SMF Formats 0 & 1 Original File Format [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING], [PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY],[CHORD PROGRESSION] 9 Yes 11–280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) Yes Yes Approx. 1.7MB Yes DC IN 12V [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1 [SUSTAIN] x 1 Yes 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm x 2 Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-130 AC adaptor) Yes • Music rest • Owner’s Manual • AC adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) • Online Member Product Registration * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Keyboard stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1) * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product, this manual may not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 69 Index A G R A-B Repeat ................................29 AC Adaptor ................................12 ACMP ........................................22 Arpeggio ....................................19 Arpeggio Velocity ................20, 41 Auto Accompaniment ................22 AUTO FILL ................................24 Auto Power Off .................... 14, 42 AUX IN ...................................... 11 AUX IN Volume .........................40 GM System Level 1 ..................... 5 Grade ........................................ 33 Grand Piano .............................. 16 Random .................................... 28 Recording Data Capacity .......... 37 Registration Memory ................ 39 Reverb ...................................... 18 Reverb Level ............................. 41 Reverb Type ........................ 41, 68 rhythm ....................................... 22 rit. .............................................. 24 B Backup ......................................43 Backup Clear .............................43 Backup Parameter .....................43 battery .......................................12 Battery Type ..............................42 Beat ...........................................15 BGM ..........................................28 C Chord ........................................15 Chord Dictionary .......................26 Chord Progression .....................36 Chord Study ..............................35 Chord Type ................................25 Chorus .......................................18 Chorus Type ........................41, 68 computer ...................................43 Computer-related Operations ......5 D Demo .........................................27 Demo Cancel ............................42 Demo Group ..............................42 Demo Play Mode .......................42 Display ......................................15 Drum Kit List ..............................61 Dual Voice ........................... 17, 41 Duo ............................................21 E Effect ................................... 18, 41 Effect Type List ..........................67 ENDING ....................................24 EQ Setting .................................14 EQ type .....................................14 External Clock ...........................42 H Harmony ................................... 19 Harmony Type ........................... 41 Harmony Volume ................ 20, 41 Headphone ............................... 13 I Initial Send ................................ 42 Initialization ............................... 43 INTRO ....................................... 24 iPad ........................................... 43 iPhone ....................................... 43 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual . 5 i-UX1 ......................................... 43 K Keyboard Display ...................... 15 Keys To Success ....................... 31 L Lesson ...................................... 31 Listening .............................. 31, 33 Local Control ............................. 42 M MAIN ......................................... 24 Main Voice .......................... 16, 41 Master EQ Type ........................ 41 Measure .................................... 15 Melody Suppressor ................... 30 Metronome ................................ 16 Metronome Volume ............. 16, 42 MIDI Basics ................................. 5 MIDI Reference ........................... 5 Music Database ........................ 23 Music Database List .................. 66 Music Rest ............................ 5, 13 Musicsoft Downloader ............... 23 N Notation .................................... 15 O One Touch Setting .................... 16 P F Fast Forward .............................28 Fast Reverse .............................28 Flash Clear ................................43 Footswitch .................................13 Function .....................................40 Function List ..............................40 Panel Sustain ...................... 18, 41 Part ........................................... 29 Passing Status .......................... 32 Pause ........................................ 28 PC Mode ............................. 41, 42 Pedal Function .......................... 41 Phrase Repeat .................... 31, 34 Playback ................................... 28 Power Requirements ................. 12 S Section ...................................... 24 Song ......................................... 27 Song Book ............................ 5, 31 Song Book Sample ................... 46 Song Category .......................... 27 Song List ................................... 64 Song Volume ...................... 27, 40 Specifications ........................... 69 Split ........................................... 17 Split Point .......................17, 22, 40 Split Voice ............................17, 41 Style ......................................... 22 STYLE FILE ................................ 5 Style List ................................... 65 Style Register ........................... 40 Style Volume ....................... 22, 40 SUSTAIN .................................. 13 Sustain ...........................18, 21, 41 Synchro Start ............................ 22 T Tap ............................................ 24 Tempo ..................................16, 24 Time Signature ....................16, 42 Timing ................................. 31, 33 Touch Response ......................... 5 Touch Sensitivity ..................14, 40 Track ......................................... 37 Transpose ................................. 40 Troubleshooting ........................ 44 Tuning ....................................... 40 U Ultra-Wide Stereo ..................... 18 USB ............................................ 5 USB TO HOST ..........................11 User Song ................................. 37 V Voice ......................................... 16 Voice List .................................. 56 W Waiting ................................ 31, 33 Wide Type ................................. 41 X XGlite .......................................... 5 Y Your Tempo ............................... 42 70 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug Für den Netzadapter mit abziehbarem Stecker Do not remove the plug from the power EN adaptor. If the plug is removed accidentally, slide the plug into place without touching the metallic parts, and then push the plug in completely until it clicks. Ziehen Sie den Stecker nicht vom Netzadapter DE ab. Sollte der Stecker unabsichtlich entfernt werden, schieben Sie den Stecker wieder hinein, ohne die Metallteile zu berühren, und drücken Sie ihn dann vollständig hinein, bis er einrastet. WARNING • Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. WARNUNG • Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Stecker am Netzadapter anschlossen bleibt. Die Verwendung des Steckers alleine kann zu elektrischen Schlägen oder einem Brand führen. • Berühren Sie bitte niemals den Metallabschnitt, wenn Sie den Stecker befestigen. Um elektrische Schläge, Kurzschlüsse oder Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, achten Sie bitte darauf, dass sich zwischen Netzadapter und Stecker kein Staub angesammelt hat. Adaptateur secteur avec fiche amovible Ne retirez pas la fiche de l'adaptateur secteur. FR Si la fiche est retirée accidentellement, remettez-la en place sans toucher les parties métalliques et faites-la glisser complètement jusqu'à ce qu'un déclic se produise. AVERTISSEMENT • Assurez-vous que la fiche reste fixée à l'adaptateur secteur. L'utilisation de la fiche seule risque de provoquer des électrocutions ou des incendies. • Ne touchez jamais la partie métallique lorsque vous insérez la fiche. Afin d'éviter les risques d'électrocution, courts-circuits ou incidents, veillez également à ce que l'adaptateur secteur et la fiche ne soient pas encrassés par la poussière. Para o adaptador de alimentação com plugue removível Não remova o plugue do adaptador de PT alimentação. Se o plugue for removido acidentalmente, encaixe-o sem tocar nas partes metálicas e, em seguida, empurre-o para dentro completamente até ouvir um clique. ADVERTÊNCIAS • Sempre mantenha o plugue conectado ao adaptador CA. O uso do plugue sozinho pode causar choque elétrico ou incêndio. • Nunca toque na parte metálica ao conectar o plugue. Para evitar choque elétrico, curto-circuito ou danos, também tome cuidado para que não haja poeira entre o adaptador CA e o plugue. Para el adaptador de alimentación con un enchufe extraíble Для адаптера питания со съемной вилкой No retire el enchufe del adaptador de ES alimentación. Si el enchufe se retira por accidente, vuelva a colocarlo en su lugar sin tocar los componentes metálicos y, a continuación, enchúfelo del todo hasta que se oiga un clic. Не снимайте вилку с адаптера питания. RU Если вилка была снята случайно, надвиньте вилку на место, не прикасаясь к металлическим частям, и наденьте ее полностью, до щелчка. ADVERTENCIA • Asegúrese de mantener el enchufe conectado al adaptador de CA. Si se utiliza el enchufe solo, se puede producir una descarga eléctrica o un incendio. • No toque nunca la sección metálica al conectar el enchufe. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, cortocircuitos o daños, fíjese en que no haya polvo entre el adaptador de CA y el enchufe. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ • Убедитесь, что вилка соединена с блоком питания. Использование вилки без блока питания может привести к поражению электрическим током или пожару. • Не прикасайтесь к металлическим частям при подключении вилки. Во избежание поражения электрическим током, короткого замыкания или повреждения оборудования убедитесь, что между блоком питания и вилкой нет пыли. Plug Fiche Enchufe Stecker Plugue Вилка * The shape of the plug differs depending on locale. * La forme de la fiche varie selon le pays. * La forma del enchufe varía según la región. * Die Form des Steckers variiert je nach Land. * O formato do plugue varia de acordo com a localidade. * В разных странах штепсельные вилки отличаются по форме. Slide the plug as indicated Faites glisser la fiche en suivant les indications Deslice el enchufe tal como se indica. Stecker wie angegeben einschieben Deslize o plugue conforme indicado Надвиньте вилку, как показано на рисунке PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 71 OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (battery) (standby) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) 72 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America. PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 73 74 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”, Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez, 03900, Mexico, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4º andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 São Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 54-11-4119-7000 VENEZUELA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Venezuela C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4 Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta Caracas Venezuela Tel: 58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 DMI8 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46 31 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 78 00 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul Tel: +90-212-999-8010 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 65-6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd. 3F, No.6, Section 2 Nan-Jing East Road, Taipei, Taiwan R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com SOUTH AFRICA Global Music Instruments World of Yamaha 19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton, South Africa Tel: +27-11-259-7700 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 PSR-E353 Owner’s Manual 75 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 01/2015 PO##*.*-**A0 Printed in China ZN22380